2016 FLEX Owner’s Manual
2016 FLEX Owner’s Manual
November 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Flex
Litho in U.S.A.
GA8J 19A321 AA
owner.ford.com ford.ca
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150925152634
Introduction
About This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Ford Credit..........................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11
Special Notices................................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................12
Export Unique Options..................................13
Environment
Protecting the Environment........................14
Child Safety
General Information.......................................15
Installing Child Restraints............................16
Booster Seats..................................................25
Child Restraint Positioning..........................27
Child Safety Locks.........................................29
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation....................................31
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................32
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................36
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................36
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................37
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................39
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™.........................40
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...................................41
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................42
Front Passenger Sensing System............43
Side Airbags.....................................................45
Safety Canopy™............................................46
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........47
Airbag Disposal..............................................48
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................49
Remote Control..............................................49
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................53
MyKey™
Principle of Operation..................................54
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Checking MyKey System Status...............57
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................58
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................58
Locks
Locking and Unlocking................................60
Manual Liftgate...............................................63
Power Liftgate.................................................64
Keyless Entry....................................................67
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................70
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................71
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................72
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................72
Audio Control...................................................73
1
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Voice Control....................................................74
Cruise Control..................................................74
Information Display Control.......................74
Heated Steering Wheel................................74
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................75
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................76
Autowipers........................................................76
Windshield Washers......................................77
Rear Window Wiper and Washers............77
Lighting
General Information......................................79
Lighting Control..............................................79
Autolamps.......................................................80
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................81
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................81
Daytime Running Lamps.............................82
Automatic High Beam Control..................82
Front Fog Lamps............................................83
Adaptive Headlamps....................................83
Direction Indicators.......................................84
Interior Lamps.................................................84
Ambient Lighting...........................................85
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................86
Exterior Mirrors................................................87
Interior Mirror...................................................89
Sun Visors.........................................................89
Moonroof..........................................................89
Instrument Cluster
Gauges................................................................91
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................92
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............95
Information Displays
General Information......................................97
Information Messages................................105
Climate Control
Manual Climate Control..............................114
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD...................115
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System.......................117
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................118
Rear Passenger Climate Controls............121
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................121
Cabin Air Filter................................................122
Remote Start..................................................122
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position..................123
Head Restraints.............................................123
Manual Seats.................................................126
Power Seats....................................................127
Memory Function.........................................128
Rear Seats.......................................................129
Heated Seats.................................................136
Climate Controlled Seats...........................137
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener...............138
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points................................143
Storage Compartments
Center Console..............................................145
Overhead Console.......................................146
2
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information....................................147
Ignition Switch...............................................147
Keyless Starting.............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................148
Engine Block Heater.....................................151
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions.......................................153
Fuel Quality....................................................154
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154
Running Out of Fuel....................................154
Refueling..........................................................155
Fuel Consumption........................................157
Emission Control System..........................158
Transmission
Automatic Transmission.............................161
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................165
Brakes
General Information.....................................172
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................172
Parking Brake..................................................173
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................174
Using Traction Control................................174
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.................................175
Using Stability Control................................176
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................177
Rear Parking Aid.............................................177
Active Park Assist.........................................178
Rear View Camera.......................................182
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................185
Using Cruise Control....................................185
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................186
Driving Aids
Blind Spot Information System..............192
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................194
Steering............................................................197
Collision Warning System.........................198
Load Carrying
Cargo Nets......................................................201
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................201
Load Limit.......................................................201
Towing
Towing a Trailer............................................209
Trailer Sway Control....................................210
Recommended Towing Weights............210
Essential Towing Checks...........................212
Transporting the Vehicle............................215
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......216
Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................218
Economical Driving......................................218
Driving Through Water................................219
Floor Mats........................................................219
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................221
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................222
Fuel Shutoff...................................................222
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................223
3
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Post-Crash Alert System..........................225
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need...............226
In California (U.S. Only).............................227
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................228
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................229
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada........................................................229
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................230
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..............................................................231
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................231
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart...........................233
Changing a Fuse...........................................242
Maintenance
General Information...................................243
Opening and Closing the Hood..............243
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................245
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................246
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................247
Engine Oil Check..........................................247
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................247
Engine Coolant Check...............................248
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check............................................................252
Brake Fluid Check........................................253
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................254
Washer Fluid Check....................................254
Changing the 12V Battery.........................254
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................256
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................256
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................257
Removing a Headlamp.............................258
Changing a Bulb...........................................258
Bulb Specification Chart............................261
Changing the Engine Air Filter................263
Vehicle Care
General Information...................................264
Cleaning Products.......................................264
Cleaning the Exterior..................................264
Waxing.............................................................265
Cleaning the Engine...................................266
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................266
Cleaning the Interior...................................267
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................267
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................268
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............268
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................268
Vehicle Storage............................................269
Wheels and Tires
General Information.....................................271
Tire Care...........................................................273
Using Snow Chains.....................................287
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........288
Changing a Road Wheel............................291
Technical Specifications..........................296
Capacities and Specific-
ations
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................297
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................297
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............298
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™......299
Vehicle Identification Number...............300
Vehicle Certification Label........................301
4
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Transmission Code Designation.............301
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec........................................................302
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™................................................305
Audio System
General Information....................................310
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................311
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD...........................................................315
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD...................................................................316
USB Port...........................................................317
Media Hub........................................................317
SYNC™
General Information....................................318
Using Voice Recognition...........................320
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............323
SYNC™ Applications and Services......336
SYNC™ AppLink™.....................................344
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................346
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................356
Accessories
Accessories....................................................365
Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).................367
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.......369
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........372
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................375
Scheduled Maintenance Record............377
Appendices
End User License Agreement.................388
5
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
7
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
8
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See SYNC™ (page 318).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
9
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 318).
Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 318).
10
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your
hands after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
FORD CREDIT
(U.S. Only)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as to help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit,
as well as to access Account Manager,
please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
11
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
a whole system. A great way to know for
sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by
the warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active
passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics
(OBD-II) system has a data port for
diagnostics, repair and reprogramming
services with diagnostic scan tools.
Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty
may not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
12
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
13
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
14
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds
from the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. We recommend
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
WARNINGS
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed
in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
contact Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in
safety seats made especially for their
height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or
vehicle interior can rise very quickly.
Exposure of people or animals to these
high temperatures for even a short time
can cause death or serious heat-related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
15
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint
type
Child size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements about
the safety of children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 43).
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
16
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers or
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
seat and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child seat fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
• For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
seat fit. See Head Restraints (page
123).
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when
installing the child seat with combination
lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is
a forward facing child seat, the steps are
the same for installing a rear facing child
seat.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
Standard seatbelts
E142528
17
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
18
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Inflatable seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
19
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
20
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child seat for installation. The ability for
the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movement
for proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
21
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat
cushion meet (called the seat bight) and
one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child seat,
however the seatbelt can still be used to
attach the child seat. For forward-facing
child seats, the top tether strap must also
be attached to the proper top tether
anchor, if a top tether strap has been
provided with your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
Second-row bucket seats and third-row
passenger side
E190825
Second-row bench seats and third-row
passenger side
E190826
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seatback below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
22
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5
inches (52 centimeters) apart. The
standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (28 centimeters)
center to center. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed
at the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments
on belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions permit
use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not
attach a child seat to any lower anchor if
an adjacent child seat is attached to that
anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Second row bucket seats and third row
passenger side
E190827
23
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Second row bench seats and third row
passenger side
E190828
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
E190829
Placement of the tether strap
• Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback, under the head
restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If needed, remove the
head restraint to improve the fit of the
child safety seat or tether strap.
• Second row center seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, remove the head restraint to
improve the fit of the child safety seat
or tether strap. See Head Restraints
(page 123).
• Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the seat
back, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down
to improve the fit of the child safety
seat or tether strap. See Head
Restraints (page 123).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be twisted
½ turn to improve installation. If the
tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the
child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
E190833
24
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
Second row bucket (40/40)
E190830
Second row bench (60/40)
E190831
Third row seat
E190832
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
25
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts,
or consider using a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
26
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat
upon which the child seat is installed all
27
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
WARNINGS
the way back. When possible, all children
age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child
restraint to determine if the restraint device
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood
of injury or death in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
28
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing
child seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
123).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
29
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
30
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single
belt for more than one person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
protection in an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt
and rear inflatable safety belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
31
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the safety belts
firmly against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal
crashes, the safety belt pretensioners can
be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the seatbelt
properly fastened. The lap portion of
the seatbelt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the seatbelt should be
positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
32
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for
child seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all seatbelts should be checked
for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly
must be replaced if the seatbelt
assembly automatic locking retractor
feature or any other seatbelt function is
not operating properly when checked by
an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the
belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat belts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If
this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and
pull webbing out again in a slow and
controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating
position whenever possible. See Child
Safety (page 15).
How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts
33
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts
(second row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is
pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable seatbelt
as you could be seriously injured or
killed.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when properly installed. This is
because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are located
in the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of
the second-row outboard seating
positions.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
47).
34
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING
If the rear inflatable seatbelt has
deployed, it will not function again.
The rear inflatable seatbelt system
must be replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable seatbelts will function
like standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes
and some side impact crashes. The fact
that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not
inflate in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.
Stowing the Rear Inflatable Seatbelt
The rear inflatable seatbelt has a snap
retainer for stowing the seatbelt against
the quarter trim panel when it is not in use.
This will prevent the seatbelt tongue from
rattling against the side of the seat and
keep it out of the way when folding or
tumbling the second row seats.
E209845
Press the retainer on the seatbelt onto the
mating snap to stow. To use the seatbelt,
pull it away from the quarter trim panel.
35
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Seatbelt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable seatbelt.
Seatbelt extensions are vehicle-specific.
See an authorized dealer to make sure you
obtain the proper seatbelt extension for
your vehicle. Use only extensions
manufactured by the same supplier as the
seatbelt. A seatbelt extension is not
available for the inflatable seatbelt. Also,
use the seatbelt extension only if the
seatbelt is too short for you when fully
extended.
SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E209844
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
36
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi-
tion...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.
37
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle
your safety belts before you switch the
ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your safety belts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
switch this feature off, the intent of
the system is to remind you to wear
your safety belt to improve your chance to
survive an accident. We recommend you
leave the system switched on for yourself
and others who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if you have
previously disabled the Belt-Minder, it will
be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See
MyKey™ (page 54). .
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 20 seconds.
38
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are no
nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.
All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies
(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt
height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a crash
should also be inspected and replaced if
either damage or improper operation is
noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 264).
39
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able
to analyze different occupant conditions
and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety
of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety
belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the safety belt pretensioners, one
or both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
40
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close
to the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate
child restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or
other injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
41
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the airbag into
your face and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance
of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters)
between an occupant’s chest and the
driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat
in the front seat, move the seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
42
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a
rear seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seatback, with your
feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E224572
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
will illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger's frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat. The sensor also turns off the
passenger front airbag and seat-mounted
side airbag when the passenger seat is
empty.
43
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then
turn the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag OFF
indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
44
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 47).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
226).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks
(of the front seats), or in front seat areas
that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these
instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an
airbag as you could be seriously injured or
killed. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the
seat) must be inspected and serviced by
an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
45
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
47).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into
contact with a deploying curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain
airbags as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNINGS
All occupants of your vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the curtain
airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including
the A, B, C and D pillar trim and headliner)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.
46
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front
and rear side windows identified by a
label or wording on the headliner or
roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 47).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it
is designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, the
Safety Canopy and rear inflatable safety
belts. Based on the type of crash, the
restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
47
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal, side
and rollover crashes.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
and when a certain likelihood of
rollover is detected by the rollover
sensor. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
48
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 49).
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If
Equipped)
E210695
Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. You can also use the key
blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
49
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E163047
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Note: A three-button remote control
operates similarly.
E138616
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. You can also use the
key blade to lock and unlock the glove
compartment. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the
key blade, then pull the blade out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
50
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
E138619
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the
transmitter near the key ring to remove
the battery cover.
2. Carefully remove the rubber gasket
from the transmitter if it does not come
off with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery.
E138620
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
upward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter.
Intelligent Access Key
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
51
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
The horn sounds and the direction
indicators flash. We recommend you use
this method to locate your vehicle, rather
than using the panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. The transmitter
has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Automatic
Climate Control (page 115).
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system does not work if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was
driven.
Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 97).
52
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with
an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must
switch the ignition on before driving your
vehicle. If you remote start your vehicle with
an intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the push button ignition switch on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the
vehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running.
If the duration is set to 10 minutes, the
duration extends by another 10 minutes.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend
the remote start up to a maximum of 35
minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory settings for the driver seat, power
mirrors, power steering column and power
adjustable foot pedals. Press the unlock
button on the remote control or unlock
your vehicle with the intelligent access key
to recall the memory positions. You can
program the remote control or intelligent
access key to recall memory positions. See
Memory Function (page 128).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 70).
53
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.
You cannot disable this feature. The
audio system will mute when the front
seat occupants’ safety belts are not
fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,
blind spot information system (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure
warning and forward collision warning
system.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions (available only in some
markets).
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed
limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
54
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac or traction control,
911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
Do Not Disturb (if your vehicle is
equipped with these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with
a push-button start, place the key fob into
the backup slot. The location of your
backup slot is in another chapter. See
Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 148).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the arrow
keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls. Use the
arrow keys to get to the following menu
selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
55
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey
settings using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or remote control.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
Clear MyKey
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
56
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 97).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to
access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
57
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless
start transmitter is not placed in the backup
position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine
(page 148).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
• The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
58
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 70).
I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
• An admin transmitter is present at vehicle
start.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 55).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
59
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E224861
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage
Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
will sound twice and the direction indicators
will not flash.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade
Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you will only
turn off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
60
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Opening a Rear Door From the
Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to
unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
unlocks the door and the second pull
opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access (If
Equipped)
The intelligent access key must be within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock
and open the door. Do not touch the lock
sensor on the front of the handle.
E185863
The locking sensors are on the front door
handles.
Touch the locking area on the front of the
door handle to lock your vehicle. There is
a brief delay before you can unlock your
vehicle again.
Note: Keep the door handle clean to make
sure the system operates correctly.
Note: Your vehicle does not automatically
lock. If you do not touch a locking sensor
your vehicle will remain unlocked.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button
on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
See Manual Liftgate (page 63).
Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
• Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
• Pressing the lock button on the remote
control even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park
(P) and the ignition off, the system will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close
the last door. If the system finds a key, all
of the doors will immediately unlock and
the horn sounds twice, indicating that a
key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
61
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
You can switch autounlock and autolock
on or off independently of each other.
To enable or disable autolock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn
sounds indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
6. Press the power door unlock control
and within five seconds, press the
power door lock control. The horn
sounds once if disabled or twice if
enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn
sounds indicating programming is
complete.
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn
sounds indicating your vehicle is in
programming mode.
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power
door unlock control. The horn sounds
once if disabled or twice if enabled.
62
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn
sounds indicating programming is
complete.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys (If Equipped)
If you leave the ignition switched on and
the engine is not running, the battery saver
will turn the ignition off when it detects a
certain amount of battery drain, or after
45 minutes have elapsed.
MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seatbelt properly. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
63
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E138632
Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
Closing the Liftgate
E155976
A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling
out. If you must drive with the liftgate open,
keep the vents or windows open so outside
air comes into your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children.
Do not allow children to operate or
play near an open or moving power
liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
If there is a problem with the open or close
request, a tone will sound for one of the
following reasons:
64
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
• The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The liftgate is not fully closed and your
vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible gas strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight from
the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to
close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E138632
2. Press the control button located in the
top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
65
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control
button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Activating the obstacle detection
feature.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.
*
*
This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until you hear a
tone, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
66
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
E174120
1. Move your foot under and away from
the rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your
foot sideways or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
2. The liftgate powers open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when washing your
vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E138637
67
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
You can use the keypad to do the
following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
• Recall memory seat and mirror
positions.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’s wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code.
You must press each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If
Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 3, 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any
of the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
68
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 60).
69
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.
The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.
70
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.
If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
71
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 123).
E191039
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E191047
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 123).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.
72
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if the
steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again. The steering column may begin
to move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it will stop just short of the end of
the column position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 128).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control
during memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the
steering column will move to allow extra
room to exit your vehicle. The column will
return to the previous setting when you
switch the ignition on. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
97).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E173608
Seek up and down or next.A
Media.B
Volume up or down.C
Mute.D
MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
73
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)
E173609
V
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E173610
Type 2
E173611
See Cruise Control (page 185).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E173617
See Information Displays (page 97).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If
Equipped)
See your SYNC information.
74
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your
feet are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 128).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
75
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Pedals (If Equipped)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 256).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E208496
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades. See Changing
the Wiper Blades (page 256).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the
amount of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It
adjusts the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is
automatically set to on and remains on until
you switch it off in the information display.
You can also switch the feature back on at
any time.
E208496
76
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. Set the
control to low sensitivity, and the wipers
will turn on when the rain sensor detects
a large amount of moisture on the
windshield. Set the control to high
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a small amount of
moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting
adjusts the wiper speed according to the
moisture on the windshield only. Use the
wiper lever to wipe the windshield
on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E208497
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe the windshield three
times with washer fluid.
• A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on and off through
the information display. See General
Information (page 97).
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper
system before using an automatic car wash.
E208498
Rotate the control to select:
Intermittent operation - the
shortest pause between wipes.
2
Intermittent operation - the
longest pause between wipes.
1
Off.0
77
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Rear Window Washer
E208498
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to activate the rear
washer. The control returns to the 2 or 0
position when you release it.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the rear washer also operates
the rear camera washer.
78
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E156651
A
B
C
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
79
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high
beam off.
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting
during low visibility driving conditions. Also,
the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility
conditions, such as daytime fog. Make sure
the headlamps are switched to auto or on,
as appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
E158778
When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 97).
Note: With the headlamps in the
autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after
you switch the windshield wipers off.
80
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a single wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
E163270
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable lit
components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control
to brighten/dim all interior lit
components incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until the
desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control
to the full on position to activate the
“dome on” feature. This will turn on the
interior courtesy lights. The lights will
remain on until the bottom of the
control is pressed.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
You can set the delay time to keep the
headlamps on for up to three minutes after
you switch off the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the
delay time (Steps 1 to 6 must be
completed within 10 seconds):
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
3. Turn the lighting control to the off
position.
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn on.
7. Turn the lighting control to the off
position when the required delay time
has been reached. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn off.
You can set the headlamp exit delay to
one of the following settings:
• Off
• 10 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 120 seconds
Note: You can adjust the time delay using
the display controls in the instrument
cluster. See Information Displays (page
97).
81
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations
or during inclement weather. The
system does not activate the tail lamps
and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions
may result in a collision.
The system switches the signature lamps
on in day light conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
ignition on, and switch the lighting control
to the off, autolamp, or parking lamp
position.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers.
The low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control
of the high beams is not functioning
properly, check the windshield in front of
the camera for a blockage. A clear view of
the road is required for proper system
operation. Have any windshield damage in
the area of the camera’s field-of-view
repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
will go into low beam mode until you clear
the blockage. A message may also appear
in the instrument cluster display noting the
front camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
will notice a decrease in the availability of
the high beam system, especially at start
up. If you want to change the beam state
independently of the automatic control, you
may switch the high beams on or off using
the lever. Automatic control will resume
when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to decide
when to turn the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
32 mph (52 km/h).
The high beams will turn off if:
• The system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the tail
lamps of a preceding vehicle.
• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.
82
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 97).
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 80).
Manually Overriding the System
E167827
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or
switch the lighting control from autolamps
to headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E156823
Pull the lighting control toward you to
switch the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
off.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (If
Equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This
provides more visibility when driving
around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
83
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position.
Note: There is a delay of two to five
seconds before the system operates when
you drive your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement
check feature. When your start your
vehicle, the lamps track left to right, then
back to center to alert the driver that the
system is working properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it
stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and
stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicator will flash for as long as you
hold the lever in this position.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when you have
met one of the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the outer edge of the clear
lens on the front row map lamp.
84
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Front Row Map Lamps
E166237
To switch on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens.
The front row map lamp will automatically
turn on when:
• Any door is opened.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
Second Row Map Lamps
E173272
The second row lamps light when:
• Any door is open.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
Press the lamp lens to activate the reading
lamps.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
85
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the control to open the window.
Lift the control to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window will stop if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
Window Lock
E163057
A
B
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls.
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational
for several minutes when you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
86
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E163059
B
A
C
Left-hand mirror.A
Off.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you
want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center
position to lock the mirrors in place.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
E163060
Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more times
within one minute, or repeated folding and
unfolding of the mirrors while holding the
control down during full travel, may disable
the system to protect the motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three
minutes with the vehicle running, and up to
10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the
system to reset and for function to return to
normal.
Pull the control back to fold the mirrors in
or out.
Loose Mirror
If you manually fold your power-folding
mirrors, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time you manually
fold the mirrors.
87
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
121).
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 128).
Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your
transmitter to unlock the doors or when
you open a door.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System
(page 192).
88
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.
You can manually open or close the sliding
shade when the moonroof is closed. Pull
the shade toward the front of your vehicle
to close it.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
89
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E163063
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically
while closing. It will reverse some distance
if there is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.
90
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E217329
Left information display. See General Information (page 97).A
Speedometer.B
Right information display. See your SYNC information.C
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your
vehicle to make sure they work. If any
lamps remain on after starting your vehicle,
refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 186).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned
on. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
the adaptive cruise control system is
engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
92
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Airbag Readiness
If this light fails to illuminate
when you switch the ignition on,
continues to flash or remains on,
it indicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer. A tone
sounds when there is a malfunction.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue
to have the normal braking system
(without ABS) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you
engage the parking brake with
the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized
dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Charging System
It illuminates when the battery
is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running , there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
indicates a problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 248).
93
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 247).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten
your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 37).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Head Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will
illuminate on the windshield in
certain instances when using
adaptive cruise control and/or the collision
warning system. It will also illuminate
momentarily when you start your vehicle
to make sure the display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Illuminates when you do not
completely close the liftgate.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel
level is low or the fuel tank is
nearly empty. Refuel as soon as
possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when
you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate
when you switch the ignition on, or begins
to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
94
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power
Illuminates when a powertrain
or an AWD fault has been
detected. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in
the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about having your vehicle
serviced. See Emission Control System
(page 158).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight times,
it means that the vehicle is not ready for
I/M testing. See Emission Control
System (page 158).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system will switch off. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 176).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition
off. See Using Stability Control (page
176).
Directional Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right or the hazard
warning flasher. If the indicators
stay on or flash faster, check for a burned
out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 258).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.
95
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
96
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)
E214426
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Menu
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
97
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Information
• Settings
Trip 1 & 2
Trip 1 & 2
Speedometer
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.
Speedometer
Shows vehicle speed digitally.
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a
given trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Econ
Average Fuel
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
Average Fuel
This display shows the average fuel
consumption since the function was last
reset.
98
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Information
Information
Intelligent AWD
MyKey® Distance (if key is programmed) — Distance traveled when a programmed key
is in use.
MyKey® Information — Number of MyKeys and admin keys programmed)
Coolant Temp. — The engine coolant indicator will change colors indicating: blue for
cool, gray for normal and red for hot. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Settings
Settings
Traction CtrlDriver Assist
Blindspot
High, Normal or
Low
SensitivityCollision Warn
Chimes
Warning
Cross Traffic
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Select your applicable languageLanguageDisplay
Miles & GAL, l/
100km or km/l
DistanceUnits
Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C)
Temperature
Auto Engine OffConvenience
99
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Auto Highbeam
Autolamp DelayAutolamp Delay
DisplayCompass
Calibrate
Set Zone
Normal or TowingDTE calculation
Easy Entry/Exit
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
All Doors or
Driver's First
Remote Unlock
Set to XXX%Oil Life Reset
Switch Enabled or Switch DisabledPower Liftgate
Auto or Last
Settings
Climate ControlRemote Start
Automatic or OffSeats and Wheel or
Seats
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
Remote OpenWindows
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
1 Year, 2 Years, 3 Years or 4 YearsTire Mobility Kit
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Traction Ctrl
Choose desired speed or OffMax Speed
Speed Minder
100
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Volume Limiter
Do Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Information Display Controls
(Type 2)
E217330
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
• Display Mode
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.
101
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Display Mode
XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 1
Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 2
Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total
odometer
Option 3
Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 4
Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ trans-
mission (SST), the cluster will change to the round tachometer if not already selected.
XXX mi (km) to empty
Shows approximate fuel level before the
fuel tank reaches empty. The value is
dynamic and can change (raise or lower)
depending on driving style.
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door
side of your vehicle. When the fuel level
becomes low, the level indicator will
change to amber. When the fuel level
becomes critically low, the level indicator
will change to red.
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.
Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.
Trip 1 & 2
Choose between the following trip
displays.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
102
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a
given trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Economy
30 Min Fuel History
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
30 Min Fuel History
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.
Driver Assist
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn
Cross Traffic
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
103
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive
Control
Vehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Auto Engine Off
Normal or TowingDTE Calcula-
tion
Easy Entry / Exit
Right Hand or Left
Hand Traffic
Traffic Set UpAdaptive Head
Lamps
Lighting
On or OffAuto Highbeam
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlocking
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Reset
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote
Start
Auto Heated or OffFront Seats
Front Seats and
Steering Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
Remote OpenWindows
Remote Close
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
MyKeys and Admin KeysMykey
Status
MyKey
104
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate
MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Traction
Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Speed Minder
On or OffVolume
Limiter
Always On or User SelectableDo Not
Disturb
On or OffMyKey
Report
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear
MyKeys
Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge
Display
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temper-
ature
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear
if a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E173229
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
time.
105
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus.
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 186).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 186).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 186).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the
driver.
AdvanceTrac Off On
Alarm
ActionMessage
The alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See
Anti-Theft Alarm (page 71).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle.
106
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in
{seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
AWD
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself
due to the system overheating or you are using the spare tire.
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and
clear this message after cycling the ignition and driving a short
distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system
cools.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly and the
powertrain fault indicator is illuminated. See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 92). If the warning stays illuminated
or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Check AWD
107
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge
has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save
Battery
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System
(page 192).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 192).
Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 192).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked See
Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
108
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Brake System
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be
inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 253).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor
radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front
of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning
system. The system will be disabled. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the
engine is on.
Engine ON
109
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting
(page 147).
No Key Detected
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and
an Intelligent Access key is not detected inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power is
Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See
an authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
programmed to the system.
Key Programmed x Keys
Total
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys
have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil
Check (page 247).
Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).Oil Change Required
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over
Temperature
110
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Transport Mode Contact
Dealer
Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer
MyKey
ActionMessage
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive
Safely
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
111
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
177).
Check Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
177).
Check Rear Park Aid
The park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See an authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Power Steering
Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
112
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 288).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 288).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. For more information on how the system operates
under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 288). If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 174).
Traction Control Off
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any
position other than P (Park).
Shift to Park
Towing
ActionMessage
The system detects trailer sway, so you need to reduce your
speed.
Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed
113
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
E210700
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
A
Air distribution control: Adjust to turn airflow from the windshield, instrument
panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through the following
combinations: windshield, windshield/floor, panel, panel/floor, and floor.
B
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
C
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
114
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
F
Rear fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated to the rear of the
passenger compartment.
G
Rear passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature to the rear of
the passenger compartment.
H
Rear climate control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear
passenger settings through the front controls.
I
Rear passenger power: Press to switch the system on and off.J
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.K
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off.L
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
M
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
E210701
115
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
MY TEMP: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also
adjusts the passenger side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
A
Power and Fan Speed Control: Press to switch the system on and off. When
the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. Adjust the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
B
DUAL: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.C
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired
temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
G
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 121).
H
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
I
116
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
E210702
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution
to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
A
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 121).
B
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired
temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside
or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
C
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it
prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.
D
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The
air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce the
time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your
vehicle.
E
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
117
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your
vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortable
temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air
through the air vents.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
G
DUAL: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.H
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.I
TEMP: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also
adjusts the passenger side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up. If the
windows fog up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold
outside temperatures, the system directs
airflow to the windshield and side window
vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
118
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.
2
Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
3
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to the
MAX A/C position.
1
Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
2
119
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.
2
Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
3
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control
Press the defrost button.Select the windshield air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
1
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Press the A/C button if the indicator is
off.
2
Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
3
Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
4
120
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E210706
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Air distribution control: Adjust the control to turn airflow from the instrument
panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through any combination
of these vents.
B
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your
vehicle.
C
Heated seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 136).
D
Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear
passenger settings through the front controls.
E
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
and fog. The heated rear window
will automatically turn off after a short
period of time. Start the engine before you
switch the heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
121
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 369).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START (If Equipped)
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle.
The climate control system works to
achieve comfort according to your
pre-selected settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. You cannot switch
on the displays or indicators during remote
start.
Switch the ignition on to return the system
to its pre-selected settings. You can now
make adjustments normally, but you need
to switch certain vehicle-dependent
features back on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays
(page 97).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on pre-selected
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated seats do not
automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats and heated
steering wheel are set to high (if available,
and selected to AUTO in the information
display). The rear defroster and heated
mirrors automatically switch on.
122
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during
heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. An improperly
adjusted head restraint may provide
reduced protection to an occupant during
certain rear impacts
123
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat head restraints
E138642
Second-row center seat head restraint
(If equipped)
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
124
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second-row outboard seat head
restraints
E162872
A
C
B
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
buttons.
C
The outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable, but they can be removed.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third-row head restraints (if equipped)
E190836
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Fold strap.C
Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head
restraint back up to reset.
Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to automatically fold
the head restraint.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
125
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, un-tilted position.
MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden
seat movement, causing loss of control of
your vehicle.
Rock the seat backward and forward
after releasing the lever to make sure
that it is fully engaged.
E190838
Recline Adjustment
WARNING
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
E190837
126
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)
E209846
POWER SEATS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
seatback when your vehicle is
moving. Adjusting your seatback
while your vehicle is in motion may cause
loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
E138647
127
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E138648
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
The memory control is on the driver door.
2
1
E205043
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.
You can recall a programmed memory
position:
• Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if the
ignition is on.
• In any gearshift position if the ignition
is not on.
You can also recall a programmed memory
position by:
• Pressing your remote control
transmitter unlock button (if the
remote control is programmed to a
memory position).
• Unlocking your vehicle with an
intelligent access key (if it is
programmed to a memory position).
• Entering a programmed personal entry
code on the Securicode keypad. See
Locks (page 60).
128
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If
Equipped)
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit
and entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2
inches (5 centimeters) rearward when the
transmission is in park (P) and you remove
the key from the ignition or you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat and steering wheel return
to their previous positions when you put
the key in the ignition or switch the ignition
on.
You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 97).
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
Second Row Seats
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in severe personal injuries
in the event of a crash.
Recline Adjustment
E209847
Note: For the bench seat only, make sure
the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. You can also fold the
seatback forward until it is flat.
129
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If equipped)
E190838
Power Fold and Tumble Seat
WARNING
Make sure that the seat is
unoccupied when folding it down.
Folding the seat while occupied
could result in occupant injury or damage
to the seat.
This feature is available for the right-hand
seat on seven-passenger vehicles and on
both sides for six-passenger vehicles.
E190848
The control is located at the back of the
rear door opening. Press it to fold the
seatback down and tumble the seat
forward for access to the third row.
Note: When you turn the ignition off, the
power fold feature works until the battery
saver turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Locks (page 60).
Keep the key in the accessory or run position
to prevent the feature from timing out.
Third Row Seats (Accessing the Seat)
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that
cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seatback. After returning the
seatback to its original position, pull on the
seatback to make sure that it has fully
latched. An unlatched seat may become
dangerous in the event of a sudden stop
or crash.
Do not adjust or release the seat
floor latch while vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the vehicle with seats
in the tumbled position. Always latch the
vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat
is occupied or empty. If not latched or if
the seat is tumbled, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.
Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row.
130
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E209848
1. Lift the handle located on the side of
the seat. The seatback will fold flat.
E190844
2. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the
third row. Note: The seatback must be
folded flat in order to release the floor
latches. Make sure that there are no
objects on the seat cushion that may
restrict the seatback from folding flat.
E190845
3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209849
4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear
latch hooks are not properly engaged to the
floor striker. If the seatback does not raise,
then repeat Step 4.
131
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Third Row Seat Exit
E209850
1. Pull on the strap located on the back
of the second row seat. This will fold
the seatback forward. Pull the strap a
second time to tumble the seat
forward, allowing easy exit from the
third row seat. Note: The seatback
must be folded flat in order to release
the floor latches. Make sure that there
are no objects on the seat cushion that
may restrict the seatback from folding
flat.
E190850
2. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209849
3. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat steps 3 and 4.
E190847
4. Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.
132
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Stowing the Third Row Seat
Note: Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub. Objects in the seat or stowage
tub may cause serious damage to the seat
upholstery and cause improper seat
function.
E210069
1. From the rear of the vehicle, stow the
head restraints by pulling the strap
located on the middle of the seatback
just below the head restraint. Then fold
the seatback by pulling and holding the
red strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release the strap once the
seatback starts rotating forward.
E209852
2. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on
the strap located at the top of the
seatback. This will tumble the seat all
the way into the floor tub.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.
E209853
Note: Do not use the third row seat back as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Sharp objects may result in damage to seat
upholstery.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.
Unstowing the Third Row Seat
WARNING
Make sure the seat is latched to
vehicle floor by pushing and pulling
on the seat. If not latched, the seat
may cause injury during a sudden stop.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or brief cases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Make sure the area under the forward
portion of the load floor is free of objects
before unstowing the third row seat.
133
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E209854
1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the floor
tub by squeezing and pulling up on the
handle. Once the seat is at a vertical
position, push the seat over, letting it
fall onto the latches.
E209852
2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then, while
holding the red strap, pull the long
strap located on the seatback to raise
the seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their
normal positions.
PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If
equipped)
The third row seat features a power
one-touch operation that allows you to
adjust the left, right, or both seats into a
NORMAL, STOW, FOLD, or TAILGATE
position with just one touch of a button.
Note: The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
tailgate is open. If the ignition is off and the
feature is still running, the battery saver will
turn it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Keyless Entry
(page 67). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.
The third row power seat buttons are
located behind the third row seats on the
left-hand quarter trim panel.
134
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E209855
Press to return the seat to the normal seating position.A
Press to stow the seat into the tub floor.B
Press the top of the button to fold down the seatback. Press the bottom portion
of the button to put the seat into the tailgate position
C
Press to select either right-hand seat, the left-hand seat or both.D
Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.
Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third
row power seat stops prematurely or travels
to an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle when the
third row seat is rotated backwards.
During a sudden stop, the seatbelts
are not functional in this position and the
third row seat can rapidly tip back to the
forward position, all of which may result in
serious injury.
135
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E209856
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Second Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
136
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the cooled seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off. You will need to reactivate
it.
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not required.
137
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
that is integrated into the driver’ s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
by calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
138
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away
from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one until
the HomeLink indicator light flashes
slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further
action is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
139
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release,every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter
until the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
140
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will change
from green to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want
to program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener motor
unit should now flash purple.
141
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and
the indicator light should blink slowly to
indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are
pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
142
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Do not use a power point for
operating a cigar lighter. Incorrect
use of the power points can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the power point and blow the
fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the rear cargo area.
• On the passenger side floor panel.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point whenever
the device is not in use. Do not use
any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when
the ignition is switched off or the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
143
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
144
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E210728
Front storage compartment.A
Cup holder.B
Center storage compartment
with auxiliary power point and
media hub.
C
Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter.
D
Rear storage compartment.E
Auxiliary power point.F
Rear climate controls.G
Second Row Center Console (If
Equipped)
E211667
Cup holder.A
Armrest.B
Utility compartment and
refrigerator unit.
C
Console Refrigerator and Freezer
(If Equipped)
This feature will operate when the vehicle
is on or in accessory mode. Limit the time
of use when the vehicle is in accessory
mode to avoid the vehicle battery running
out of charge. You should only use this
feature when the vehicle is running.
E211653
145
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
Flip the console lid forward, then lift off the
cover to open the cooling compartment.
Make sure to replace the cover after using
it. This helps maintain a more consistent
cooling temperature.
E211668
Refrigerator: Briefly press and hold COOL.
The indicator light on the cool side of the
switch will illuminate and the indicator
light on the freeze side will glow when the
refrigerator is active. The temperature will
cool to approximately 41°F (5°C). Briefly
press and hold COOL again to switch off
the refrigerator. Briefly press and hold
FREEZE to change to freezer mode.
Freezer: Briefly press and hold FREEZE.
Both indicator lights will illuminate when
the freezer is active. The temperature will
cool to approximately 23°F (-5°C). Press
FREEZE again to switch off the freezer.
Press COOL to change to refrigerator
mode.
This feature turns off when you switch the
vehicle off. It turns back on to the last
mode when you restart the vehicle.
Cleaning and Maintenance
Note: Condensation on the inside walls of
the refrigerator is normal under certain
conditions.
This feature is maintenance free, but you
can clean the inside of the unit and the
cover with a mild soap and water solution
when needed.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
146
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or
other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)
C
D
B
A
E163165
A (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.
B (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.
C (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D (start) - Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
147
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
148
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.
149
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 97). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
150
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk
of electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow
it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This
could damage the power cable and may
cause an electrical short resulting in fire,
injury and property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
151
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
152
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded fuel container.
Gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause
serious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, wash the affected areas
immediately with plenty of soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately
if you experience any adverse reactions.
153
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. We do not recommend fuels with
an octane rating below 87.
For vehicles with EcoBoost engines, to
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered
by the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and on a steep slope, more
fuel may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.
154
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel system filler neck. This
may damage the fuel system filler neck or
its seal and cause fuel to run onto the
ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the
household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the plastic funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 154).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they will not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the
fuel tank filler pipe opening.
5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or properly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
155
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into
the fuel tank.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
E206911
A B
C D
Type 1: Left hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
A
Type 1: Right hand side - press
the fuel tank filler door to open
it.
B
Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
C
Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until
it engages.
156
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep it
resting on the cover of the fuel tank
filler pipe opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut
off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel
tank is full.
E206912
A B
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine
if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable
fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range.
157
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty.
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 297). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank
even when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is
your engine’s break-in period). A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi
(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequency
of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not
accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record
the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per
gallon) fuel consumption, divide miles
traveled by gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Keeping records during
summer and winter will show how
temperature impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces
fuel economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
which can start a fire.
158
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you
smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’ s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 155).
159
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
160
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and latch the gearshift in park (P).
Turn the ignition to the off position
and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously
for more than three seconds will limit
engine rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)
With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down while in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.
Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This increases
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission (If Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission gearshift lever.
The SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears up or
down (without a clutch) as desired.
161
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage will
not be caused to the engine from
over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button.
If equipped with the toggle on the
gearshift lever:
• Press the (+) button to upshift.
• Press the (-) button to downshift.
E142629
If equipped with steering wheel
paddles:
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by moving the gearshift lever to the sport
(S) position.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
The system determines when temporary
manual control is no longer in use and
returns to automatic control.
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
Upshifts when accelerating (recom-
mended for best fuel economy)
Shift from:
15 mph (24 km/h)1 - 2
25 mph (40 km/h)2 - 3
40 mph (64 km/h)3 - 4
45 mph (72 km/h)4 - 5
50 mph (80 km/h)5 - 6
The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear.
Note: The system stays in manual control
until you make another shift selection (for
example, drive [D]).
162
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll
freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle
movement, always fully set the parking
brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheel chocks if appropriate.
If you fully release the parking brake
and the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the
ignition is in the on position and the brake
pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out
of park (P) position with the ignition in the
on position and the brake pedal pressed,
a malfunction may have occurred. It is
possible that a fuse has blown or your
vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating
properly. See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 233).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake
lamps are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition off and remove the key.
E211089
2. Remove the cup holder insert.
3. Using a screwdriver (or similar tool),
release the tab to the access door and
remove.
4. Locate the brake shift interlock lever
on the passenger side of the shifter
assembly.
5. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
down and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift lever
out of park (P) and into neutral (N).
6. Install the access door and cup holder
insert.
7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.
163
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life
of your vehicle. A new vehicle or
transmission may have firm shifts, soft
shifts or both. This operation is considered
normal and does not affect function or
durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process fully updates
transmission operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
164
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to
power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input
from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities
in which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions.
Operating your vehicle under other than
those conditions could subject the vehicle
to excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is
present, the warning Check AWD displays
in the information display. The AWD system
is not functioning correctly and defaults to
front-wheel drive. When this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to
front-wheel drive. This may occur if the
vehicle is operated in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function as
soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
minutes. After the engine has been
restarted and the AWD system has
adequately cooled, the AWD OFF message
will turn off and normal AWD function
returns. If the engine is not stopped, the
AWD OFF message turns off when the
system cools and normal AWD function
returns.
All-Wheel Drive Messages
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
Displayed when the system has been
automatically disabled to protect itself.
This is caused by operating the vehicle with
the compact spare tire installed or if the
system is overheating. The system will
resume normal function and clear this
message after cycling the ignition on and
off and driving a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the system is
allowed to cool.
AWD OFF
Displayed in conjunction with the power-
train malfunction/reduced power light
when the system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Check AWD
165
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Spare Tires
A spare tire of a different size other than
the tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically
and enter front-wheel drive only mode to
protect driveline components if a non-full
sized tire is installed. This condition may
display an AWD OFF message in the
information display. If there is an AWD OFF
message in the information display from
using a non-full sized spare tire, this
indicator should turn off after reinstalling
the repaired or replaced normal road tire
and cycling the ignition off and on. It is
recommended to reinstall the repaired or
replaced road tire as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system.
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires
WARNING
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such
as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire
and wheel size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of
the driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. Additionally the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
If you have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system. However, the AWD
system is capable of tolerating any
combination of new and worn tires of the
same original tire size. For example, using
3 worn tread tires and 1 new tread tire all
of the same original tire size, can be
tolerated by the AWD system.
166
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is in
P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized
dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
167
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (that is, turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and
as far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid
abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from
concrete to gravel) there will be a
change in the way the vehicle responds
to a maneuver (steering, acceleration
or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip
through Brake, Engine, and AWD
calibrations. However, during low speed
driving, disabling traction control in deep
sand can help keep the wheels moving to
maintain vehicle momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could
cause the AWD system to overheat and
default to front-wheel drive. If this occurs,
an AWD OFF message displays in the
information display. To resume normal
AWD function as soon as possible, stop
the vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the AWD
system has adequately cooled, the AWD
OFF message turns off and normal AWD
function returns. In the event the engine is
not stopped, the AWD OFF message turns
off when the system cools and normal
AWD function returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L
(Low) gear when possible. L (Low) gear
operation will maximize the engine and
transmission cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect
overheating of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.
168
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom
of the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and
proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets
wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in
water, have the power transfer unit (PTU)
or rear axle serviced by an authorized
dealer.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
169
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or
cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 172).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).
170
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.
171
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 268).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 92).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized
dealer. If the anti-lock brake system is
disabled, normal braking is still effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
172
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the transmission is
locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
173
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control
light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure
you did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display
Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.
The switch illuminates when traction
control is off.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.
174
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system,
tire construction and wheel and tire size
may change the handling characteristics
of your vehicle and may adversely affect
the performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the systems
applies higher brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’ s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 174).
175
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 174).
176
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some
(generally large and fixed) objects when
moving on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Certain objects with surfaces that absorb
ultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle's
parking aid systems, traffic control
systems, fluorescent lamps, inclement
weather, air brakes, and external motors
and fans may also affect the function of
the sensing system; this may include
reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to avoid
damaging your vehicle. The system may
not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 54).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear sensing
system may detect that add-on device and
therefore provide warnings. It is suggested
that you disable the rear sensing system
when you attach an add-on device to your
vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 97).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 105).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 10 in
(25 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
10 in (25 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
177
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot
replace the driver’s attention and
judgment. The driver is responsible for
avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe
distance and speed, even when the system
is in use.
Active Park Assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pressing the
active park assist button (if equipped).
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain, snow or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Active Park Assist is an electric parking aid
that uses ultrasonic sensors. The system
detects an available parallel parking space
and automatically steers your vehicle into
the space (hands-free) while you control
the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly instructs you
to park your vehicle.
178
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high off the
ground (for example, a bus, tow truck or
flatbed truck). If you are uncomfortable
with the proximity to any vehicle or object,
you may choose to override the system.
The system may not operate correctly in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are improperly
inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer
or similar object to the front or rear of
your vehicle, close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• The front bumper or side sensors are
damaged or obstructed (front bumper
cover).
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist
E144525
Press the button to turn the
system on or off.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. A message and a
corresponding graphic appears in the
display screen to indicate it is searching for
a parking space. Use the direction indicator
to indicate which side of your vehicle you
want the system to search.
Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on your
vehicle's passenger side.
E130107
When the system finds a suitable space,
the touchscreen displays a message and
a chime sounds. Slow down, continue
moving forward and stop when another
chime sounds and a message displays on
the touchscreen, then follow the
instructions on the touchscreen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a
truck), street furniture and other items. You
must make sure the selected space is
suitable for parking.
179
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 22 mph
(35 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input is detected), the system
switches off and you need to take full
control of your vehicle.
Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before
completion, the system switches off. The
steering wheel position will not indicate the
actualy position of the steering and you have
to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into
reverse (R), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
your vehicle steers itself into the space.
The system displays instructions to move
your vehicle back and forth in the space.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid
(accompanied by a touchscreen display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
display screen displays a message and a
chime sounds, indicating that the active
park assist process is done. The driver is
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before putting the transmission in park (P).
Deactivating the Park Assist
Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Turning off the traction control system.
180
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
• Something touches the steering wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed
by a chime. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors
can affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when
reverse [R] is selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle
properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space.
181
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed,
etc).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
You didn't wait for the steering to complete its rotation after a gear change. The system
performs best when the steering wheel is allowed to finish rotating before accelerating.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the luggage
compartment door is ajar. If the
luggage compartment door is ajar, the
camera will be out of position and the
video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’ s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
182
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (If equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change the
steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.
183
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle may not
show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
184
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays.
E173610
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator will change color.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select kph as the display
measurement in the information
display, the set speed changes in
approximately 2 kph increments. When
you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display, the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
185
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
Adaptive cruise control does not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or
when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
when towing a trailer that has trailer
brakes. The auto-brake component
of the adaptive cruise control system does
not operate the trailer brakes. Using
adaptive cruise control when towing a
trailer that has trailer brakes may result in
the loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the
system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
E173611
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The indicator appears in the
information display.
E164805
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
186
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E164805
5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is
a vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does
your vehicle always decelerate quickly
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance.
A vehicle graphic illuminates in the
information display.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The brake lamps
automatically turn on when the system
applies the brakes. The maximum braking
which the system applies is limited. You
can override the system by applying the
brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
187
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Setting the Gap Distance
E173611
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the graphic. You can select four gap
settings.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance automatically
adjusts to the set speed.
Adaptive cruise control gap settings
Dynamic beha-
vior
GapTime gap,
seconds
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between
vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system selects the last chosen gap.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
188
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 2 km/h increments.
When you select mph as the display
measurement in the information
display the set speed changes in
approximately 1 mph increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES. Your vehicle speed
returns to the previously set speed and gap
setting.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h). An audible warning
sounds and the automatic braking releases
if the vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations
such as prolonged downhill driving on
steep grades, for example in mountainous
areas. The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent them from overheating.
Note: An audible warning sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off
Press and release OFF when the system
is in stand by mode or switch the ignition
off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
189
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected
once they have moved fully into
your lane.
A
Motorcyclists may be detected
late, or not at all.
B
With vehicles in front of you
when going into and coming out
of a bend. The detection beam
does not follow sharp curves in
the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.
If something hits the front of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is located on the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
does not function when something
obstructs the radar signals.
190
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural environments.
A false blocked condition self clears or
clears after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, the system does
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
and automatic braking does not activate.
191
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system is
designed to alert you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind spot zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns
on when you start the engine and you drive
your vehicle forward above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind
Spot Information System remains on while
the transmission is in drive (D). If shifted
into reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot
Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears
except the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
192
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a
replacement for careful driving.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and
snow in front of the sensors and/or driving
in heavy rain can cause system
degradation. Also, other types of
obstructions in front of the sensor can
cause system degradation. This is referred
to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system
will no longer provide any vehicle warnings.
You can clear the information display
warning but the alert indicators will remain
illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in
two ways:
• After the blockage in front of the
sensors is removed or the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or
stops, drive for a few minutes in traffic
to allow the sensors to detect passing
vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display. See Information
Messages (page 105).
193
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page
97). When the Blind Spot Information
System switches off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display shows
a system off message. The telltale in the
cluster also illuminates. When you switch
the Blind Spot Information System on or
off, the alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system switches back on every
time you start your vehicle.
You can also have the Blind Spot
Information System switched off
permanently at an authorized dealer. Once
switched off permanently, the system can
only be switched back on at an authorized
dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as
a replacement for using the interior
and exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross
Traffic Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions
while your transmission is in reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
194
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
E142441
195
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage
on that side is severely limited.
System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an
amber alert indicator in the outside mirror
on the side of your vehicle the approaching
vehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert
also sounds an audible alert and a
message appears in the information
display indicating a vehicle is coming from
the right or left. Cross Traffic Alert works
with the reverse sensing system that
sounds its own series of tones. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 177).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud,
snow or bumper stickers to obstruct these
areas, this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 192). If the
Blind Spot Information System is blocked,
Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A
corresponding message appears in the
information display as soon as you shift
the transmission into reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather
conditions or debris build-up on the sensor
area may limit vehicle detection.
196
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
• Severe weather conditions.
• Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
Certain conditions may reduce the visibility
of the warning lamp; therefore, it is
recommended to keep the audible warning
on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors
may detect the trailer thus causing a false
alert. It may be desirable to turn the Blind
Spot Information System off if the false
alerts become annoying.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic
Alert off in the information display. See
General Information (page 97). When
you switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you will
not receive alerts and the information
display will display a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently,
the system can only be switched back on
at an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If
a fault is detected, a message displays in
the information display. Stop your vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you
may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition
may exist. Obtain immediate service from
an authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
197
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
(If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s
attention, and judgment, or the need to
apply the brakes. This system does NOT
activate the brakes automatically. Failure
to press the brake pedal to activate the
brakes may result in a collision.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks. A radar detects if
your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.
198
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and
an audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the brakes
but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force
braking is applied even if the brake pedal
is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 97).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See General
Information (page 97).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
199
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean
but the message remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering
with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface
of the road may interfere with the radar
signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if
the driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
200
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
CARGO NETS
WARNING
This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
E210596
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
provided anchors. Do not put more than
50 lb (22 kg) in the net.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low
center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Take
extra precautions, such as slower speeds
and increased stopping distance, when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the roof rack, is 100 lb
(45 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
You must place loads directly on the
crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails.
When using the roof rack system, we
recommend that you use genuine Ford
accessory crossbars specifically designed
for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer or both, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum
return of vehicle design
201
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for
determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, with or without a trailer,
from the vehicle’s Tire Label or
Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight
of the vehicle including a full tank
of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include
passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the
weight of your new vehicle when
you picked it up from your
authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle can be
found on the Tire Label on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver
door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have
a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX
kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by
the assembly plant. If you install
any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed
equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire Label in order to
determine the new payload.
202
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
WARNING
The appropriate loading
capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
E143817
CARGO
203
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Cargo Weight - includes all
weight added to the Base Curb
Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment. When towing,
trailer tongue load or king pin
weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is
the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) including
vehicle curb weight and all
payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or
rear). These numbers are shown
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -
is the Vehicle Curb Weight, plus
cargo, plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers
and cargo). It is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The Gross Vehicle Weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
204
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
205
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
GCW (Gross Combined Weight)
- is the Gross Vehicle Weight plus
the weight of the fully loaded
trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating) - is the maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle
and the loaded trailer, including
all cargo and passengers, that the
vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must
never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight - is the highest possible
weight of a fully loaded trailer the
vehicle can tow. It assumes a
vehicle with mandatory options,
driver and front passenger weight
(150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal
or external) and a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or
king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth
wheel trailer). Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer) for more
detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel
King Pin Weight - refers to the
amount of the weight that a trailer
pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound
(2268 kilogram) conventional
trailer, multiply 5000 by 0.10 and
0.15 to obtain a proper tongue
load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an
11500 pound (5216 kilogram) fifth
wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin
load range of 1725 to 2875 pounds
(782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the original
tires do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result
in serious damage to the vehicle
and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:
206
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 -
(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
207
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the Front or the Rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating
position.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded
vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, should be
taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo
and people than most passenger
cars. Depending upon the type
and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may
raise the center of gravity of the
vehicle.
208
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or
the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the
limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage,
transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have
electrical items, such as fuses or
relays, related to towing. See
Fuses (page 233).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop. When both
the loaded vehicle and trailer
are connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in the Load Carrying
chapter. See Load Limit (page
201).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.
209
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford
does not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 105). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
201).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 feet² (1.86
meters²) if your vehicle can tow a
class I trailer or 40 feet² (3.72
meters²) if your vehicle can tow a
class III trailer.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1000 feet (300 meters)
starting at the 1000 foot (300
meter) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Check
state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer
weights listed may be limited to
this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to use electric trailer
brakes.
210
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.
Maximum trailer
weight
Maximum GCWRPowertrain and
trailer class
2,000 lb (907 kg)6,900 lb (3,131 kg)3.5L TiVCT front-
wheel drive, Class I
2,000 lb (907 kg)7,050 lb (3,199 kg)3.5L TiVCT all-wheel
drive, Class I
2,000 lb (907 kg)7,075 lb (3,209 kg)3.5L GTDi all-wheel
drive, Class I
4,500 lb (2,042 kg)
*
9,359 lb (4,245 kg)3.5L TiVCT front-
wheel drive, Class III
4,500 lb (2,042 kg)
**
9,524 lb (4,320 kg)3.5L TiVCT all-wheel
drive, Class III
4,500 lb (2,042 kg)
**
9,625 lb (4,366 kg)3.5L GTDi all-wheel
drive, Class III
*
For towing trailers up to 3500 pounds (1588 kilograms), use a
weight-carrying hitch and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue
loads through your vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers
over 3500 pounds (1588 kilograms), up to 4500 pounds (2042
kilograms), we recommend you use a weight-distributing hitch to
increase front axle load while towing.
**
For towing trailers up to 4500 pounds (2042 kilograms), use a
weight-carrying hitch and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue
loads through your vehicle's underbody structure.
211
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 201).
Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector
(Vehicles with a Trailer Towing
Package and 7–Pin Connector)
E211391
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop
lamp
Green
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
212
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than
it was before attaching the trailer. Doing
so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park your vehicle, without the trailer,
on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight distributing bars so that the
height of the front fender is
approximately halfway between H1 and
H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not
level, adjust the ball height accordingly
and repeat Steps 3–6.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle
may not have enough braking power and
your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems
are required for safe control of towed
vehicles and trailers weighing more
than 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)
when loaded.
Trailer Brake Controller Connector
(If Equipped)
The connector is located under the
instrument panel above the brake pedal.
213
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
E211392
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance
in proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
214
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 inches (15 centimeters) above
the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which
is not a normal maintenance inspection
item unless there is a possibility of a leak
or other axle repair is required.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
215
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot
shift into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
161).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being
towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 114).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.
You can tow your 3.5L EcoBoost or 3.5L
Duratec equipped vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless
start button until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door
key to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 254).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
216
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Turn off your vehicle by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions. See
Ignition Switch (page 147).
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 254).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
All Vehicles
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground (by using
a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This causes damage to your
all-wheel drive system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.
217
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480
kilometers). During this time, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10
miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.
218
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to
prevent them from moving and interfering
with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
219
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
220
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare, if
provided with the vehicle (except
vehicles supplied with a tire inflation
kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.5 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is
operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside
services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This program
is eligible within Canada or the continental
United States.
221
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
you may contact your dealer, you can call
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit
our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them
off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious
injury. Ford Motor Company recommends
that the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel
to the engine. Not every impact will cause
a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle. For
vehicles equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the
engine by pressing the brake pedal and
the START/STOP button, or switch
on the ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without
pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
222
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
an authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables
with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+)
terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped.
A spark may cause an explosion of the
gases that surround the battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
223
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
224
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
225
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Additional information and resources are
available online:
Website
www.owner.ford.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
226
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
227
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
228
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower
than is recommended for your vehicle,
contact our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
229
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
230
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
231
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-
index-76.htm (English)
Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-
index-76.htm (French)
Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
232
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses
that protect the vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 254).
E173618
97
98
77
96
95
94
93 92 91 90 89
88
66
44
78
56
39
26
18 1617
3 12456789
192021222324
2728293031
40414243
55
575859606162636465
798081828384858687
67
45
32
10111213
333435
464748495051
6869707172
74
73
76
75
53
37 36
54
38
25
15
14
52
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Fan relay 2.
40A
**
1
Fan relay 1.
40A
**
2
Trailer brake control module.
30A
**
3
Wipers.
30A
**
4
Washer pump.
Anti-lock brake system pump.
50A
**
5
233
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Center console power point.
20A
**
6
Power liftgate.
30A
**
7
Moonroof.
20A
**
8
Second row console power point.
20A
**
9
Third row power seats relay.Relay10
Heated rear window relay.Relay11
Trailer tow battery charge relay.Relay12
Starter motor relay.Relay13
Cooling fan number 2 relay.Relay14
Fuel pump relay.Relay15
Not used.-16
110V AC power point.
30A
**
17
Front blower motor relay.
40A
**
18
Starter relay.
30A
**
19
Storage bin power point.
20A
**
20
Instrument panel power point / cigar
lighter.
20A
**
21
Third row seat module.
30A
**
22
Driver power seat.
30A
**
23
Memory module.
Trailer tow battery charge.
30A
**
24
Not used.-25
Rear window defroster.
40A
**
26
Heated mirrors.
Cargo power point.
20A
**
27
234
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Front climate controlled seats.
30A
**
28
Front heated seats.
20A
**
29
Rear heated seats.
20A
**
30
Electric fan relay 3.
25A
**
31
Auxiliary blower motor relay.Relay32
Cooling fan #1 relay.Relay33
Front blower motor relay.Relay34
Cooling fan (series) relay.Relay35
Not used.-36
Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn lamps
relay.
Relay37
Trailer tow reverse lamps relay.Relay38
Auxiliary blower motor.
30A
**
39
Not used.-40
Not used.-41
Passenger power seat.
30A
**
42
Anti-lock brake system valves.
20A
**
43
Windshield washer relay.Relay44
Rain sensor.
5A
*
45
Canister vent solenoid (EcoBoost engines).
5A
*
46
Washer pump.
15A
*
47
Front park lamps.
10A
*
48
Not used.-49
Heated mirrors.
10A
*
50
235
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Powertrain control module — Injector
power monitor (non-EcoBoost engines).
5A
*
51
Not used.-52
Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn lamps relay.Relay53
Not used.-54
Wiper relay.Relay55
Fuel injectors.
30A
*
56
Fuel pump relay.
Left-hand high intensity discharge head-
lamp.
20A
*
57
Alternator sensor.
10A
*
58
Brake on/off switch.
10A
*
59
Trailer tow back-up lamps.
10A
*
60
Not used.-61
A/C clutch relay.
10A
*
62
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps.
15A
*
63
Rear wipers.
15A
*
64
Not used.-65
Powertrain control module – vehicle power
relay.
Relay66
Vehicle power #2 – oxygen sensor heater.
20A
*
67
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
Vehicle power #4 (ignition coils).
20A
*
68
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control
module).
20A
*
69
Vehicle power #3 (coil) – A/C clutch relay.
15A
*
70
236
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Fan control relay coils 1-3.
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
Not used.-71
Not used.-72
Not used.-73
Not used.-74
Not used.-75
Not used.-76
Trailer tow park lamps relay.Relay77
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
*
78
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
*
79
Not used.-80
Not used.-81
Rear washer.
15A
*
82
Not used.-83
Trailer tow park lamps.
20A
*
84
Not used.-85
Powertrain control module.
5A
*
86
Keep alive power and relay.
Powertrain control module relay.
Canister vent solenoid (non-EcoBoost
engines).
Run/start relay.
5A
*
87
Run/start relay.Relay88
Anti–lock brake system module.
10A
*
89
237
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Powertrain control module run/start.
10A
*
90
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
*
91
Front blower relay coil.
5A
*
92
Power steering module.
Auxiliary blower motor.
5A
*
93
Rear window defroster relay.
Battery charge relay.
Body control module run/start.
30A
**
94
Front passenger window switch.
5A
*
95
Not used.-96
Not used.-97
A/C clutch relay.Relay98
*
Mini Fuses
**
Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering wheel. You
may need to remove a trim panel to access
it.
238
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Passenger side rear window.30A1
Memory seat.15A2
Second row seats.
Passenger side front window.30A3
Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4
Audio amplifier20A5
Active noise control module.
Not used (spare).5A6
Driver seat module logic.7.5A7
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.
Power liftgate.10A8
239
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
SYNC module.10A9
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Run accessory relay.10A10
Front wiper motor relay.
Intelligent access module logic.10A11
Heads-up display.
Puddle lamp.15A12
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.
Right-hand direction indicators.15A13
Left-hand direction indicators.15A14
Center high mounted stop lamp.15A15
Backup lamp.
Right low beam headlamp.10A16
Left low beam headlamp.10A17
Third row power seats.10A18
Start button.
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Anti-theft system.
Not used (spare).20A19
Locks.20A20
Not used (spare).10A21
Horn relay.20A22
Steering wheel control module logic.15A23
Instrument cluster.
Steering wheel control module.15A24
Datalink.
Liftgate release.15A25
Ignition switch.5A26
Push button ignition switch.
240
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Intelligent access module power.20A27
Not used (spare).15A28
Radio.20A29
Global positioning system module.
Front park lamps.15A30
Trailer tow relay for park lamps.
Front side markers.
Trailer tow brake controller.5A31
Smart window motors.15A32
Master window and mirror switch.
Lock switch illumination.
Moonroof.
110V AC power point.
Interior rearview mirror.
Not used (spare).10A33
Reverse park aid module.10A34
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Interior mirror.
Climate control humidity sensor.5A35
Heads-up display.
Heated steering wheel.10A36
Refrigerator.10A37
Front passenger window switch.10A38
High beams.15A39
Rear park lamps.10A40
License plate lamps.
Occupant classification sensor.7.5A41
Restraint control module.
Not used (spare).5A42
Not used (spare).10A43
Not used (spare).10A44
241
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control module.10A46
Fog lamp relay.15A47
Front direction indicators.
Front passenger power window.30A Circuit breaker48
Rear power windows.
Delayed accessory relay.Relay49
Body control module.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with
one that has the specified amperage
rating. If you use a fuse with a higher
amperage rating, you may cause severe
wire damage and may start a fire.
E142430
A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a
failed fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.
242
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E203008
1
243
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
2
E203009
3
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your
left-hand side.
E202009
4
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
244
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC
I EFGH
A
B
C
D
E223186
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 248).A
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 253).B
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 254).C
Engine compartment fusebox. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 233).D
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 263).E
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 252).
F
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 247).G
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 254).I
245
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E173375
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 248).A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 247).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 247).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 253).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 254).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 233).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 263).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check (page 252).
H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 254).I.
246
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is
between the minimum and the maximum
marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that
meets Ford specifications. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
297).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and
use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
247
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indic-
ator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly. Also, spilling
coolant on hot engine parts can burn you.
WARNINGS
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
coolant could make it difficult to see
through the windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure
relief cap. The cooling system is under
pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when you loosen the cap
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 369).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F
(-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair® Coolant
and Battery Refractometer 75240. We do
not recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
248
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. Use prediluted engine coolant
meeting the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
297). The use of an incorrect coolant may
harm the engine or cooling system
components and may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system
with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
297).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
249
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% decrease
the overheat protection characteristics
of the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40%
provides improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to
the red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start your engine. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long
as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest
in a safe location and seek immediate
repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your
vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and
may completely shut down without
warning, potentially losing engine power,
power steering assist, and power brake
assist, which may increase the possibility
of a crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
250
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized
dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until
the fluid temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’s engine
may temporarily reach higher
temperatures during severe operating
conditions such as ascending a long or
steep grade while pulling a trailer in high
temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED
TO LOWER TEMP message may appear
in the information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power.
In order to manage the engine fluid
temperatures, your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
many factors such as vehicle loading,
towing, grade and ambient temperature.
If this occurs, there is no need to pull off
the road. You can continue to drive your
vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When
the engine coolant temperature decreases
to a normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red (hot) area.
After several minutes, if the
temperature does not drop, follow the
remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart
your engine and continue.
251
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling
Works in this chapter for more
information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
WARNING
Do not use supplemental
transmission fluid additives,
treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in
damage to internal transmission
components.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level
WARNING
The dipstick and surrounding
components are hot. Use gloves
when moving components and
checking the transmission fluid level.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.
Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
E190273
A
B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 246).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A
low fluid level can damage the transmission.
252
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point B) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.
Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid
*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction.
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.
*
Vehicles With EcoBoost Engine
WARNING
Do not run the engine with the air
filter disconnected.
1. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
2. Remove the air filter assembly securing
bolts.
3. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
4. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly
in a counterclockwise direction.
5. Check the transmission fluid level.
6. Install the air filter assembly in reverse
order. Tighten the air filter assembly
securing bolts until you feel a strong
resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need
to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.
253
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 297).
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 297).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
254
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the
battery has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start
the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 310). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 86).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 310).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press
the accelerator pedal to start the
engine.
255
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
7. While the engine is running, press the
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace wiper blades annually for
optimum performance.
Front Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arms away from the
windshield.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Press the locking buttons together.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you switch the ignition on.
Rear Wiper Blade
Lift the wiper arms away from the rear
window.
256
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E183236
1. Remove the wiper blade.
2. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim
Headlamp Aim Target
E142592
8 ft (2.4 m).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
25 ft (7.6 m).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away from
a vertical wall or screen.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Measure the height from the center of
the headlamp to the ground.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center of the
headlamp bulb.
4. Mark a horizontal reference line on the
vertical wall or screen that is a
minimum of 8 ft (2.4 m) long.
5. Switch the low beam headlamps on
and open the hood.
E142465
6. There is a distinct change from light to
dark in the left-hand portion of the
headlamp beam pattern. Position the
top edge of this cut-off 3 in (7.5 cm)
below the horizontal reference line.
257
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E220457
7. To adjust the vertical aim, use a
suitable tool to rotate the adjuster
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern while
adjusting one headlamp, block the light
from the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and switch the low
beam headlamps off.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not adjustable on your
vehicle.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp
assembly, you must first remove the front
fascia and front bumper assemblies. We
recommend you see an authorized dealer.
E220458
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.
Failure to do so could result in
serious personal injury.
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 261).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
258
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Headlamp
E220459
A B
C
Headlamp low beam. Headlamp
high beam.
A
Front direction indicator. Front
parking lamp.
B
Front direction indicator. Front
parking lamp.
C
Front Direction Indicator and Front
Parking Lamp
2
4
3
E220501
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
Headlamp Low Beam and
Headlamp High Beam
Note: If your vehicle has high-intensity
discharge headlamps, these lamps operate
at a high voltage. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
3
E220460
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
259
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped)
E220461
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Use suitable tools, for example a
screwdriver and a socket wrench, to
remove the wheel arch liner fixings.
Carefully reposition the wheel arch liner
to access to the front fog lamp bulb
and electrical connector.
Note: To remove the lower push pin, use a
flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center
release pin.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
E174588
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Brake and Rear Lamps, Rear
Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp
E220463
C
B
A
D
2
Rear side marker lamp.A
Rear lamp.B
Reversing lamp.C
Brake and rear lamp. Rear
direction indicator.
D
260
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1
E220462
1. Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly. Gently pull the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front side marker lamps.
• Side direction indicator.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Stop and rear lamp.
License Plate Lamp
E220617
1
2
3
1. Remove the screws that secure the
lamp assembly.
2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
261
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
27/93157NA
Front direction indicator.
Front parking lamps.
55/659008 H13
Headlamp low beam.
Headlamp high beam.
55H11Front fog lamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
5194Rear side marker lamp.
5194Rear lamp.
LEDLEDOptional stop and rear lamp.
27/33157K
Brake and rear lamp.
Rear direction indicator.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
16921Reversing lamps.
5C5WLLicense plate lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
10578Interior lamp.
10578Rear dome lamp.
612V6WMap lamp.
262
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter
the air induction system. Engine
components are susceptible to damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 369).
Incorrect component use can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page
298).
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
E200522
x2
6
1
2
1. Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
263
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash
ZC-3-A
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
ZC-23 (U.S.)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
264
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
265
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.
266
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the
belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong
detergents. Such products could
contaminate the side airbag system and
affect performance of the side airbag in a
collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel
to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 268).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
267
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY
WHEELS (If Equipped)
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
268
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
269
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
270
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized
Ford dealer to have the system
reprogrammed. If you intend to change the
size of the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 273).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can
also be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door last post;
next to the driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining
these tire pressures at all times. Failure to
follow the tire pressure recommendations
can cause uneven treadwear patterns,
reduced fuel economy, and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types
of vehicles. To reduce the risk of
serious injury or death from a rollover or
other crash you must avoid sharp turns and
abrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for
the conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload
or improperly load your vehicle, and make
sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and
children/infants must use appropriate
restraints to minimize the risk of injury or
ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel
drive vehicle in low traction situations, it
won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
E145298
271
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.
How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
272
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in center
of gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition. These differences that
make your vehicle so versatile also make
it handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
273
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
274
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) or
36 psi (2.5 bar) depending on tires
size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
275
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
276
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.
Speed ratingLetter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter
rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
277
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
278
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
279
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
280
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire
cracking, tread separation, or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increase
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
build-up and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control, and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear flat.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
281
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
282
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors
such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number
Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same
size, load index, speed rating and
type (such as P-metric versus
LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which
283
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
is located on the B-Pillar or edge
of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle, transfer case or
power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire
replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire to set the beads without
additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for
mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet
(3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear
protection.
For a mounting pressure more
than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure, a Ford
dealer or other tire service
professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires
with a remote air fill with the
person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
284
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in
snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at
over 35 mph (56 km/h). The
tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
285
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as
indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
E142547
286
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size,
load index, and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury,
and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also
strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S snow chains,
snow cables or equivalent on the front
axle for P235/60R17, P235/60R18, and
P235/55R19 equipped vehicles. The
use of snow chains, snow cables or
other traction assist devices that are
larger than SAE Class S may cause
damage to your vehicle’s wheel house,
suspension and/or body.
• Do not install tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices on the rear
tires. This could cause damage to the
vehicle’s wheel house or body.
• Do not use tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices with
255/45R20 tires.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying
that the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with
tire cables on your vehicle.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the cables. If this does
not work, remove the cables to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are
no longer needed. Do not use tire
cables on dry roads.
287
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked periodically
(at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see
Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure
to properly maintain your tire pressure
could increase the risk of tire failure, loss
of control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
288
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this
chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
289
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pres-
sure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
290
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28
kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21
kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient
temperature. This lower pressure value
may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one
or more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive
the vehicle to the nearest location where
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the
tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system
sensor and valve stem on the wheel must
be replaced by an authorized dealer after
use of the sealant.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 288). If the tire
pressure monitor sensor becomes
damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 288). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:
291
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off
the ground, the transmission alone
will not prevent your vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N).
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park
(P) or neutral (N), set the parking brake,
and block (in both directions) the wheel
that is diagonally opposite (other side and
end of your vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
292
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Never get underneath a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on
the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Note: If the third row seat is stowed in the
floor, you will need to unstow it to access
the spare tire.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E211099
4. Remove the carpeted floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle, then
remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
6. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket by
turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the jack kit from the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack, L-shaped bolt, and
the wrench from the felt bag. Fold
down the wrench socket to use to
loosen the lug nuts and to operate the
jack.
293
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
8. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise,
but do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E201156
10. Put the jack in the jack notch next to
the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
12. Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
296).
15. Install the wheel cover.
Stowing the flat tire
E194296
294
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
If you are stowing the flat tire, remove the
L-shaped bolt from the external pocket of
the felt bag. With the third row seat in the
raised position, stand the flat tire in the
rear of the vehicle with the tire’ s valve stem
facing the rear of the vehicle. Fasten the
flat tire to the vehicle by inserting the
L-shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt
holes in the wheel. Turn it clockwise into
the threaded hole in the vehicle until the
tire is secured.
If you are stowing the temporary spare tire,
place the tire over the jack and secure it
with the large wing nut.
Stowing the jack
E211100
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the lug
wrench socket into the handle and
place the jack and wrench into the felt
bag. Place the extension bolt or
L-shaped bolt into the external pocket
of the felt bag. Position the jack as
shown to make sure that the locating
holes in the jack base can be placed on
the locating tabs of the jack mounting
bracket in the spare tire tub.
2. Securely close the wrench
compartment and the jack bag using
the Velcro™ straps.
3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket
in the spare tire tub, using the locating
tabs to position the jack correctly.
E211101
4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With
the jack in place, place the looped end
of the retention bracket over the
threaded stud in the trunk floor and
secure it with the plastic wing nut.
295
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting
surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off
while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
100 lb.ft (135 Nm)1/2 x 20
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
296
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
3.5L V6Engine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.8:1Compression ratio
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L Engine
E191904
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
214Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.0295 - 0.0335 in (0.75 mm - 0.85 mm)Spark plug gap
10.0:1Compression ratio
297
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
3.5L EcoBoost Engine
E191904
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-650Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2301 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2103 (passenger side)
WW-1202Rear window wiper blade
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 369).
298
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Part NumberComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-534Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2301 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2103 (passenger side)
WW-1202Rear window wiper blade
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 369).
299
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
300
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
GSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
301
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.2 qt (12.5 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L) *Automatic transmission fluid
2.43 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.31 lb (1.05 kg)A/C refrigerant
8.96 fl oz (265 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
* Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
302
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
303
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
304
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.7 qt (13 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
11.6 qt (11 L) *Automatic transmission fluid
2.43 pt (1.15 L)Rear axle fluid (All Wheel Drive)
305
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel
Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.45 lb (1.11 kg)A/C refrigerant
7.95 fl oz (235 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
* Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
306
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S.
and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
307
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Do
not use oil labeled with API SN service
category unless the label also displays the
API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
the International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
308
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
309
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
310
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITE
RADIO
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle option
package, your system may look different
from what you see here.
311
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
E210707
A B
O
N
M
L
K
J
E
I
H
C
F
G
D
RADIO: Press this multiple times to select a radio band. Press and hold to
select the autostore function. Press to return to the main screen of the active
radio band.
A
CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons to scroll through the
menu choices.
B
Number block: In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To
store a radio station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode, select a track. In phone mode, enter a phone
number.
C
Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending
on which mode you are in (for example Radio mode or CD mode).
D
TUNE: Press to manually search through the radio frequency band.E
312
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If a specific category is selected (such as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select
the previous or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the
current track.
F
OK and Arrow buttons: Press OK to confirm menu selections. Press to scroll
through the menu choices.
G
Eject: Press to eject a CD.H
VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
I
CLOCK: If not in phone mode, press to display the clock.J
SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you
make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the
settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for
each audio source independently.
K
MENU: Press to access different audio system features.L
PHONE: Press to access the phone features of the SYNC system. See your
SYNC information.
M
AUX: Press to access or switch between devices you plug into your vehicle.N
SIRIUS: Press to listen to Sirius satellite radio.O
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
Radio
Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.Scan
Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM-
AST and FM-AST frequency bands.
AST
Select to display extra information such as artist name.
Radio Text
*
*
Extra information may not always be available.
313
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Audio Settings
Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for
speed and wind noise. You can set the system between
0 and +7.
Speed Compensated
Volume
Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.
Sound
Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.
Occupancy Mode
Choose between the stereo modes. Only with the external
sound systems.
DSP
CD Settings
Select to scan all disc selections.Scan All
Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.Scan Folder
Clock Settings
Select to set the time.Set Time
Select to set the calendar date.Set Date
Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.
24h Mode
Display Settings
Select to change display brightness.Dimming
Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.
Language
Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
Temp. setting
314
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E210708
A
E D
B C
Eject: Press to eject a CD.A
CD slot: Insert a CD.B
TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
C
315
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
D
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold
to move quickly forward through the current track.
E
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: The touchscreen controls most of
the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E210709
316
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
SOURCE: Press to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM, Satellite
Radio and Line in.
A
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band
and press this button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In CD mode, press to select the previous or next track. Press and hold
to move quickly forward through the current track.
B
SOUND: Press to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you
make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the
settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. Sound settings can be set for
each audio source independently.
C
TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency
band.
D
VOL and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
E
USB PORT (If Equipped)
E176344
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
You can locate the media hub inside the
center console or on the instrument panel.
E211463
See your SYNC information.
317
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
E198355
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player. This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report
and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions
& Information).
*
• Use applications, such as Stitcher, via
SYNC AppLink.
**
• Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected
phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
• Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).
*
These features are not available in all
markets and require activation.
**
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
318
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health
Report and to view the reports online.
• Required to activate the
subscription-based SYNC Services and
to personalize your Saved Points and
Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
319
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice button, wait
until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a
command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the
system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice button.
Initiating a Voice Session
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 74).
When prompted you can say any of the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Stream audio from your phone.Bluetooth Audio
Cancel the requested action.Cancel
Access mobile applications.mobile (apps | applica-
tions)
Make calls.Phone
Access the device connected to your USB port.USB [1]
Run a vehicle health report.Vehicle Health (Report)
320
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback.Voice Settings | Voice
Preferences
Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode.Help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (cancel | stop | exit) appears you say; cancel or
stop or exit.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where mobile (apps | applications) appears, you must say mobile followed
by either apps or applications.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
Note: SYNC Services and Vehicle health report are only available in the United States of
America.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings). You can
customize the voice recognition system to
provide more or less instruction and
feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.
Adjusting the Interaction Level
E142599
Initiate a voice session by
pressing the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. See
Voice Control (page 74).
When prompted say the following:
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Voice Settings | Voice Preferences
Followed by either of the following:
Provide more detailed interaction and guidance.Interaction Mode
Standard
Provide less audible interaction and more tone prompts.Interaction Mode
Advanced
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
321
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there are multiple possible
responses to your request. For example,
the system may ask "Phone, is that
correct?". If turned off, the system simply
makes a best guess as to what you
requested and may ask you to confirm
settings.
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the command; you may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
Confirmation Prompts
Off
Clarify your voice command with a short question.Confirmation Prompts
On
The system creates candidate lists when
it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice command.
When turned on, it may prompt you with
as many as four possibilities for
clarification.
For example, say "Say 1 after the tone to
call John Doe at home. Say 2 after the tone
to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after
the tone to call Jane Doe at home." You
could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play
John Doe, Say 2 after the tone to play
Johnny Doe."
If you want the system to carry out the followingVoice command
Make a best guess from the media candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Media Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for media candidates.Media Candidate Lists On
Make a best guess from the phone candidate list. You may
still occasionally be asked questions.
Phone Candidate Lists
Off
Clarify your voice command for phone candidates.Phone Candidate Lists
On
322
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cell phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cell
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone's
compatibility, see your cell phone's manual
and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 1000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with
SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Press the phone button. When the display indicates there is no cell phone paired,
do the following:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.NO PHONE
FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
323
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Depending on your cell phone's capability
and your market, the system may prompt
you with questions, such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically
tries to connect with first upon vehicle
start-up) and downloading your
phonebook.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Put the transmission in
position park (P) (automatic transmission)
or neutral with the parking brake applied
(manual transmission).
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
ActionMessage
Press the OK button.PHONE SETNGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
Press the OK button. When the following message appears
in the display.
ADD DEVICE
FIND SYNC 1. Press the OK button.
2. Put your cell phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See
your device's manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone's display, enter the
six-digit PIN provided by SYNC in the radio display. The
display indicates when the pairing is successful.
The system then prompts with questions, such as if you would like to set the current cell
phone as the primary cell phone (the cell phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up) or download your phonebook.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say:
Voice Commands
Phone
You can then say any of the following
commands.
Call History Incoming
Call History Missed
Call History Outgoing
Voice Commands
Phonebook ___
Phonebook ___ at Home
Phonebook ___ at Work
Phonebook ___ in Office
Phonebook ___ on Cell
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
324
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
You can also say any of the following:
Voice Command
Call ___
Call ___ at Home
Call ___ at Work
Call ___ in Office
Call ___ on Mobile
Call ___ on Other
Dial
None of these commands are available
until your cell phone information is
completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Mom".
The following commands are only
available during active calls:
Voice Commands
Go To Privacy
Hold
Join
Phone Menu Commands
To access the phone menu with voice
commands, press the voice button and
when prompted say:
Voice Command
[Phone] Menu
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Voice Command
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
On
[Phone] Settings [Message] Notification
Off
[Phone] Settings [Set] Phone Ringer
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 1
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 2
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer 3
[Phone] Settings [Set] Ringer Off
Battery
Phone Name
Signal
Text Message Inbox
Send [New] Text Message
You do not need to say word contained
within brackets for the system to
understand your command.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press MENU to go to the
PHONE menu.
Phonebook Commands
When you ask SYNC to access content, for
example the phonebook name or number,
the requested information appears in the
display to view.
325
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Making a Call
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This command is not available until your cell phone informa-
tion is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.
Call ___
Use to enter a phone number digit by digit.Dial
When the system confirms the number say one of the following commands:
To confirm the number and initiate the call.Dial
To erase the last spoken digit. You can also press the left
arrow button.
delete
To erase all spoken digits. You can also press and hold the
left arrow button.
clear
To end a call, press and hold the red phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone
button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding
the red phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active
Call
During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, for
example putting a call on hold or joining
calls. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Press the MENU button during an active call, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.CALL MENU
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to switch a call from an active hands-free envir-
onment to your cell phone for a more private conversation.
PRIVACY
Press the OK button to put an active call on hold.CALL HOLD
Join two separate calls. SYNC supports a maximum of three callers
on a multiparty call or conference call.
JOIN CALLS
326
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands
to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll to Join Calls, and press the OK button. Wait until the following
message appears.
Press the OK button.JOIN CALLS
Enter tones such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired
number appears in the display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
ENTER TONES
To access your phonebook contacts.PHONEBOOK
1. Press the OK button to select, and then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the contact.
To access your call history log.CALL HISTORY
1. Press the OK button to select, then scroll through your call history
options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
Accessing Features Through the
Phone Menu
The phone menu allows you to redial a
number, access your call history and
phonebook and sends text messages as
well as access cell phone and system
settings. You can also access advanced
features, for example 911 Assist, Vehicle
Health Report and SYNC Services.
327
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to redial the last number called.PHONE REDIAL
Press the OK button again to confirm.
Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls after you
connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC.
1
PHONE REDIAL
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
INCOMING
OUTGOING
MISSED
The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook
and call history each time your cell phone connects to SYNC (if the
auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
supports this feature).
To browse your phonebook select:PHONEBOOK
Press OK. Scroll down or up to the
desired name and press OK.
BROWSE
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phone-
book name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK. The phone
number that is stored under the
selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
To search for a contact in your phone book select:
Press OK.SEARCH
Scroll down until you see the first letter
of your phonebook entry. Press OK.
Scroll down until you see the second
letter of your desired phonebook entry.
Press OK.
328
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Repeat entering letters to narrow your
search. When you are satisfied with
your entry press the right arrow key on
the bezel.
SYNC will jump to the phonebook
contact name that matches your entry.
Press OK.
In addition to the Phonebook entry
name, the phone number label (Work,
Cell, Home or Other) shows on the
display. If there are multiple phone
number entries for a particular Phone-
book name, you can scroll through the
different phone labels at this time.
Once you have the desired phone label
on the screen press OK.
The phone number that is stored under
the selected label will be shown on the
display. Press OK to dial this number.
Press the OK button to send, download, read and delete text
messages.
1
TEXT MESSAGE
View your cell phone's status, set ring tones, select your message
notification, change phonebook entries and automatically download
your cell phone content among other features.
1
PHONE SETNGS
Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various
types of information, for example traffic reports and directions.
3
SYNC Services
Automatically place an emergency call to a 911 operator following
a crash.
4
911 Assist
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle.
3
Vehicle Health
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smart-
phone.
APPLICATIONS
329
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings and advanced menu listings.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button to exit the phone menu.EXIT MENU
1
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a cell phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3
This is an optional feature and available in the United States only.
4
This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only.
Text Messaging
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent
feature. Your cell phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text
message.
When a new text message arrives, an
audible tone sounds and the information
display indicates you have a new message.
Following the notification you can do
any of the following:
Do nothing to have the message go into
your text message inbox.
To have SYNC read you the message using voice commands, press the voice
button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
SYNC will read the most recent text message to you.Read Message | Read
Text Message | Text
Message
To open the test message, press OK to
receive and open the text message. Press
OK again and SYNC reads your message
aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose
whether you’d like to reply or forward the
message.
330
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Reply or forward the message, press OK and scroll to choose between:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to access and then scroll through the
list of pre-defined messages to send.
REPLY TO MSG
Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in
your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose enter a
number.
FORWARD MSG
Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a cell phone-dependent
feature. If your cell phone is compatible,
SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages.
Note: Sending a text message is a
speed-dependent feature. It is only available
when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5
km/h) or less.
Note: You can only have one recipient per
text message.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.TEXT MESSAGE
Select one of the following:
Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-
defined set of 15 messages.
SEND MSG?
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to your desired message.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Scroll through your phonebook, call history entries or enter
a new number.
5. Press the OK button to enter the desired contact.
6. Press the OK button again when the system asks if you
would like to send the message. The system sends each
text message with the following signature: This message
was sent from my Ford.
331
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Allows you to download your unread messages to SYNC. To
download the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates the system is downloading your messages.
When downloading is complete, SYNC returns you to the
inbox.
DOWNLOAD MSG
Allows you to delete current text messages from SYNC. To
delete the messages, press the OK button to select. The
display indicates when it is finished deleting all your text
messages. SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
DELETE ALL
Press the OK button to exit the current menu.RETURN
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are cell phone-dependent features.
Your cell phone settings allow you to
access and adjust some features. For
example ring tones, text message
notification, modify your phonebook and
set up automatic download.
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.PHONE
SETNGS
Select one of the following:
See the provider, name, signal power, battery power and roaming
status of your connected cell phone.
PHONE
STATUS
Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. When done,
press OK again to return to the phone status menu.
Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call. You can choose
one of the system ring tones or your cell phone ring tones.
SET RINGER
Press the OK button and scroll to hear the available options. You can
also choose to use to use your phone's ring tone.
Press the OK button to select the desired ring tone. If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone ring plays when you choose
the phone ringer option.
You have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a
text message arrives.
MSG NTFY
332
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button then select one of the following and press the
OK button again to confirm.
MSG NTFY ON
MSG NTFY OFF
Modify the contents of your phone book (such as add, delete, down-
load). Press OK to select and scroll between:
MODIFY
PHONEBOOK
Press the OK button to add more contacts from your
phonebook. Push the desired contact(s) on your cell
phone. See your cell phone's manual on how to push
contacts.
ADD
CONTACTS
Press OK to delete the current phone book and call
history. When Delete Phonebook appears, press OK
to confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
DELETE
PHONEBOOK
Press OK to select and press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
DOWNLOAD
PHONEBOOK
Automatically download your phone book each time your phone
connects to SYNC. Press OK to select.
AUTODOWN-
LOAD
When this message appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each time.
AUTO ON?
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook every
time your phone connects to SYNC. Your phonebook,
call history and text messages can only be accessed
when your specific phone is connected to SYNC. *
When enabled, SYNC speaks the contact name that is displayed on
the screen during phonebook browsing.
SPEAK NAMES
Exit the current menu.RETURN
* Downloading times are cell phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. When Auto
Download is on, it automatically deletes any changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download.
System Settings
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll
through the menu options.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices, set a
cell phone as primary as well as turn your
Bluetooth feature on and off.
333
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the Phone button to enter the Phone Menu, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
Select one of the following:
See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 323).
1
ADD DEVICE
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.
2
CONNECT BT
Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones.
Scroll until the desired device is chosen, then press OK to
connect the phone.
Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone.
3
SET PRIMARY?
Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone.
Press OK to confirm.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
4
BT ON/OFF
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. When the
desired selection is chosen, press OK.
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices
and turns off all Bluetooth features.
Delete a paired cell phone.DEL DEVICE
Press the OK button and scroll to select the device. Press OK
to confirm.
Delete all previously paired phones (and all information
originally saved with those phones).
DELETE ALL
Press OK to select.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
1
This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2
You can only connect one device at a time. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
3
SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a phone
is selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
4
Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and deactivates all Bluetooth
features.
334
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults,
perform a master reset, install an
application and view system information.
To access the advanced menu, press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu,
the scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK.SYS SETTINGS
Press OK.ADVANCED
Select one of the following:
Get help from SYNC by using questions, helpful hints or asking you for
a specific action. To turn these prompts on or off:
PROMPTS
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to select between On and
Off.
2. Press the OK button when the desired selection appears in the
display. SYNC returns you to the Advanced menu.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. Choose
between English, Français and Español. Once selected, all of the
radio displays and prompts are in the selected language.
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. If you
change the language setting, the display indicates that the system
is updating. When complete, SYNC returns you to the Advanced
menu.
LANGUAGES
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase
your indexed information, for example phonebook, call history, text
messages or paired devices.
DEFAULTS
Press the OK button to select and then press OK again when the
following message appears in the display.
RESTORE?
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC, for example
phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices, and return
the system to the factory default settings.
MASTER
RESET
Press OK to select. The display indicates when complete. SYNC returns
you to the Advanced menu.
Press OK to select.SYNC REBOOT
335
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press OK to select. You only need to press
the OK button once. SYNC will be unre-
sponsive for 2-4 minutes while it is
rebooting. Wait 2-4 minutes before
attempting to execute a SYNC command
CONFIRM REBOOT?
Install applications you have downloaded.INSTALL APP
Press the OK button and scroll to select. Press the OK button to
confirm.
Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number.SYSTEM INFO
Press the OK button to select.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)
In order for the following features to work,
your cell phone must be compatible with
SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services
*
: Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such
as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report
*
: Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report
card of your vehicle.
*
This is an optional feature and available
in the United States only.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not
dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged
in a crash. Failure to do so may cause
serious injury to someone or damage the
phone which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
336
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 41). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 221).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.
Switching 911 Assist On or Off
Press the phone button to enter the phone menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.911 Assist
Press the OK button when the desired option appears in the
radio display.
On
Off
Off selections include:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Provides a display and voice reminder at phone connection
at vehicle start.
Off with reminder:
Provides a display reminder only without a voice reminder at
phone connection.
Off without reminder:
To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
337
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If
Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair
for any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status
of any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
338
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle Health
Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle's overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by an authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
You can run a vehicle health report after
your vehicle has been running a minimum
of 60 seconds. Choose one of the following
options.
To use voice commands, press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system will run a vehicle health report of your vehicle's
diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it
combines with scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection items
that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health (Report)
To use the screen, press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Vehicle Health
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button and select on or off.Auto On?
339
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run a
health report at certain mileage intervals.
*
Scroll to select between 5000, 7500 or 10000-mile intervals.
Select your desired option and press the OK button.
Report Interval
Press the OK button for SYNC to run a health report of your
vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford
where it combines with scheduled maintenance information,
open recalls, other field service actions and vehicle inspection
items that still need servicing by an authorized dealer.
Run Report
Exit the current menu.Return
*
You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions
& Information (TDI) (If Equipped,
United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level
and model year and may require a
subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn
directions available in select markets.
Message and data rates may apply. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change
or discontinue this product service at any
time without prior notification or incurring
any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use,
SYNC Services. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 323).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make sure
your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID
before using SYNC Services.
340
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, place you in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of errors, changes in roads, traffic
conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service
may collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your
paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Services
Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts
to request the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
Once you are connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.(what are my (options |
choices) | what can I say
| [available] commands)
341
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.help
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where (options | choices) appears you say either; options
or choices.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; what are my (options | choices) appears, you must say; what are
my, followed by either, options or choices.
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
(what can I say [available] commands) appears, you can say, what can I say commands.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button, then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYNC Apps
Services 1. Press the OK button. The display indicates the system is
connecting.
2. Press the OK button again. SYNC initiates the call to the
Services portal.
3. Once you connect to the service, follow the prompts to
request the desired service, for example traffic or direc-
tions.
342
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
When connected to SYNC Services, press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
To receive directions to a location. Once you select your
destination, the system uploads your current vehicle location,
calculates a route based on current traffic conditions and
sends it back to your vehicle. After the route download is
complete, the phone call automatically ends. You then receive
audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward
your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates
a route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back
to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call automatically ends. You then receive audible and
visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destina-
tion.
Business search
You can also say the following:
To find the closest business or type of business to your loca-
tion, within business search.
Search near me
If you need further assistance in finding a location at any time
within a Directions or Business search and need to speak with
a live operator.
Operator
The live operator can assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections.
The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. Operator Assist
is a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/
support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the
route updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends
a new route to your vehicle.
Yes
*
*
During an active route.
343
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
To disconnect from SYNC services, say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
From the SYNC Services main menu, or press and hold the
phone button on the steering wheel.
Goodbye
SYNC Services quick tips
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker
access to your most used or favorite information. You can
save address points, for example work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or a news
category. You can learn more about personalization by logging
onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time while connected to SYNC
Services to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip and say
your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle Identification
Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle
equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
Portable
You can even access your account outside your vehicle. Just
use the number on your phone's call history. Traffic and
Directions features do not function properly but information
services and the 411 connect and text message features are
available.
SYNC™ APPLINK™
SYNC Mobile Apps
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port in order to start the
application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available
if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord
Touch system.
Note: Depending on your display type, you
can access AppLink from the media menu,
the phone menu, or by using voice
commands. Once an app is running through
AppLink, you can control main features of
the app through voice commands and
steering wheel controls.
344
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Access Using the Phone Menu
Press the phone button to access the
SYNC phone menu on-screen. You can
then scroll to:
Menu item
Press OK to access a list
of available applications.
Mobile Apps
Scroll through the list of
available applications and
press OK to select a
particular app. Once an
app is running through
SYNC, you can access an
app’ s menu by pressing the
MENU button to first
access the SYNC menu.
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, sticher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
To Access Using the Media Menu
Press the AUX button on the center
console.
Press the Menu button to the SYNC menu and scroll to:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press the OK button.SYNC-Media
Press the OK button and scroll through the list of available
applications and select your desired app.
Mobile Apps
Scroll until the app name followed by
"Menu", is displayed (such as, Stitcher
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can
access an application's features, such as
Thumbs up and Thumbs down.
For more information, please visit:
Website
www.SYNCMyRide.com
345
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and descriptionVoice command
Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC,
you can press the voice button and speak commands specific
to the app, for example, "Playlist Road Trip".
Mobile Apps
You can also say the following:
To discover the available voice commands.The name of an app
(such as Stitcher)
followed by "help".
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, for example artist and album.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod®,
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. SYNC also supports the
following audio formats MP3, WMA, WAV
and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.
To Connect Using Voice Commands
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 317).
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
voice commands. See Media voice commands.
USB [1]
You do not need to say words that appear within square brackets. For example, for where
USB[1]appears, you can say USB or USB one.
346
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Connect Using the System Menu
Plug the device into the USB port. See
USB Port (page 317).
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SELECT SRC
Press the OK button.SYNC USB
Depending on how many digital media files are on your
connected device, the following message may appear in the
radio display.
Indexing…
When indexing is complete, the screen returns to the Play menu. You can then
select one of the following:
PLAY ALL
ARTISTS
ALBUMS
GENRES
PLAYLISTS
TRACKS
EXPLORE USB
SIMILARMUSIC
Exit the current menu.RETURN
What's Playing?
When a track is playing, you can ask the
system to tell you what is currently playing.
347
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
The system reads the metadata tags of the playing track,
and if the metadata tags are populated, the system will tell
you what track is playing.
Whats This? | Whats
Playing?
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where text shows: (what's | what is) playing, you must say; "what's playing"
or "what is playing".
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice button and when
prompted say any of the following:
Voice command
USB [1]
You can then say any of the following
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
Play All
1,2
Play Artist ___
1,2
Play Album ___
1,2
Play Genre ___
3
[Play] Next Folder
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
1,2
Play Playlist ___
3
[Play] Previous Folder
Voice command
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
1,2
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
Repeat [On]
Repeat Off
Shuffle [On]
Shuffle Off
1,2
Search Album ___
1,2
Search Artist ___
1,2
The system searches all
the data from your
indexed music and, if
available, begins to play
the chosen type of music.
You can only play genres
of music which are present
in the GENRE metadata
tags that you have on your
digital media player.
Search
Genre ___
348
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command
1,2
The system searches for a
specific artist/track/album
from the music indexed
through the USB port.
Search
Track ___
| Search
Song ___
1,2
This allows you to make
your previous command
more specific. By using this
command you can filter
though a previous selec-
tion, such as an artist to
play only specific album.
Refine
album ___
The system compiles a
playlist and then plays similar
music to what is currently
playing from the USB port
using indexed metadata
information.
Similar
Music
Autoplay Off
Turn autoplay on to listen to
music processed during
indexing. Turn autoplay off to
allow the indexing process to
finish before the system plays
any of your music.
Autoplay
[on]
1
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".
2
This voice command is not available until
indexing is complete.
3
This voice command is only available in
folder mode.
Bluetooth Audio Command Guide
Press the voice button and say:
Voice command
Bluetooth Audio
You can then say any of the following:
[Phone] Connections | [Media] Connec-
tions | [Bluetooth] Connections
Pause
Play
[Play] Next Track | [Play] Next Song
[Play] Previous Track | [Play] Previous
Song
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your
media source, how to play your music, for
example by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat,
and to add, connect or delete devices.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
349
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore
USB to view the supported digital music
files on your playing device.
PLAY MENU
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
Select one of the following:
Press the OK button to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also
plug in devices to charge them (if supported
by your device). Once connected, the
system indexes any readable media files.
1
SYNC USBSELECT SRC
Press the OK button. This is a phone-
dependent feature that allows you to
stream music playing on your Bluetooth-
enabled phone. If supported by your device,
you can press seek to play the previous or
next track.
SYNC BT
Press the OK button to select and play
music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers.
2
SYNC LINE IN
(If Equipped)
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Auto-
play settings. Once you turn these selections on, they remain
on until you turn them off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.
3
MEDIA SETTIN
Press the OK button to shuffle available
media files in the current playlist. To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All
in the play menu and then select Shuffle.
SHUFFLE
Press the OK button to repeat any song.REPEAT
Press the OK button to turn autoplay on to
listen to music processed during indexing.
Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing
process to finish before the system plays
any of your music.
4
AUTOPLAY
350
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your
smartphone.
APPLICATIONS
Access available Bluetooth Device menu listings as well as
Advanced menu listings.
SYS SETTINGS
Press OK to exit the media menu.EXIT MENU
1
The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs
to index. If autoplay is on, you can listen to media processed during indexing. If autoplay
is off, you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum
indexing file size.
2
If you have already connected a device to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data
and music separately.
3
Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.
4
Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs
the system needs to process.
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play
your media by artist, album, genre, playlist,
track, similar music or even to explore what
is on your USB device.
Make sure that your device is plugged into
the USB port and is turned on.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.PLAY MENU
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. If there are
media files, you have the following options:
Press the OK button. The first track title appears in the
display.
PLAY ALL
Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in
flat file mode, one at a time in numerical order.
351
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Sort all indexed media by artist. Once selected, the system
lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. If
there are fewer than 255 indexed artists, the system lists
them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
ARTISTS
1. Press the OK button. You can select to play all artists or
any indexed artist.
2. Scroll to choose the desired artist. Press the OK button.
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are fewer than 255
indexed albums, the system lists them alphabetically in flat
file mode. If there are more than 255, the system categorizes
them alphabetically.
ALBUMS
1. Press the OK button. You can enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any individual
indexed album.
2. Scroll to choose the desired album. Press the OK button.
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. SYNC lists the
genres alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
GENRES
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press the OK button.
Access your playlists from formats ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
The system lists your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, the system categorizes them
alphabetically.
PLAYLISTS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist. Press the OK button.
Search for and play a specific indexed track. SYNC lists your
tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are more than
255, the system categorizes them alphabetically.
TRACKS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to select the desired track. Press the OK button.
352
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
Explore all supported digital media on your media device
connected to the USB port. You can only view media content
which is compatible with SYNC; other files saved are not
visible.
EXPLORE USB
1. Press the OK button.
2. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive.
Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB
port. The system uses the metadata information of each song
to compile a playlist for you.
*
SIMILARMUSIC
1. Press the OK button.
2. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins
playing. This feature does not include tracks with incom-
plete metadata information. Press the OK button.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
*
With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks are not
available in voice recognition, play menu or similar music. However, if you place these
tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode", they are available in voice
recognition, play menu browsing and similar music. The system places Unknown items
into any unpopulated metadata tag.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your
Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu
features.
Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to enable, disable, add, connect and delete
a Bluetooth device.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.BT DEVICES
You can then select one of the following:
Pair more devices to the system.
*
ADD DEVICE
353
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Action and DescriptionMessage
1. Press the OK button. When find SYNC appears in the
display, press the OK button again.
2. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your
phone into discovery mode. A six-digit PIN appears in the
display.
3. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display, enter
the PIN.
Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone.Connect BT
1. Press OK to select and view a list of devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen and press OK to
connect the device.
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
**
BT ON/OFF
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button.
Delete a paired media device.DEL DEVICE
1. Press the OK button and scroll to select the device.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Delete all previously paired devices.DELETE ALL
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button to confirm.
Exit the current menu.RETURN
*
This is a speed-dependent feature. It is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3
mph (5 km/h) or less.
**
Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth
features.
Advanced
The Advanced menu allows you to access
and set prompts, languages, defaults and
perform a master reset.
Press the AUX button, then the Menu
button to enter the Media Menu.
354
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
You can then scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.SYS SETTINGS
Press the OK button.ADVANCED
You can then select one of the following:
Have SYNC guide you by asking questions, helpful hints or
ask you for a specific action.
PROMPTS
1. Press the OK button and scroll to toggle between on and
off.
2. Make a selection and press the OK button. SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Choose from the available languages. The displays and
prompts are in the selected language.
LANGUAGES
1. Press the OK button and scroll through the available
languages.
2. Press the OK button when the desired language appears
in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the display indicates
that the system is updating. When complete, SYNC takes
you back to the Advanced menu.
Return to the factory default settings. This selection does
not erase your indexed information, for example phonebook,
call history, text messages and paired devices.
DEFAULTS
1. Press the OK button.
2. Press the OK button. When restore defaults appears in
the display, press the OK button again to confirm.
Completely erase all information stored on SYNC. All
phonebook, call history, text messages and all paired devices
will be deleted and the system will return to the factory
default settings.
MASTER RESET
Download available software applications through the USB
port.
INSTALL APP
Exit the current menu.RETURN
355
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC perform-
ance.
There is excessive back-
ground noise during a phone
call.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to down-
load my phonebook.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on
your phone's capability.
The system says Phonebook
Downloaded but the
phonebook in SYNC is
empty or missing contacts. If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
356
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC. Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firm-
ware.
Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.
357
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
This may be a possible
device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.
Review the device compatib-
ility chart on the SYNC
website to confirm your
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.
This is a phone-dependent
feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.
Make sure that all song
details are populated.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.
Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.
The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copy-
right protection, which does
not allow it to play.
358
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate your
account on the website.
You may have the wrong
VIN (vehicle identification
number) listed.
I received a text that I did
not activate Vehicle Health
Report.
Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your
account.
When you register your
account, you must choose a
preferred dealer. If it already
lists a dealer, try selecting
another dealer and logging
out. Log back in, change it
back to your preferred
dealer, and retrieve the
report.
The preferred dealer
information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the
report on the website, or I
receive a system error.
Update your cellular number
in your account on the
website.
This could be due to your
phone's compatibility.
Bad signal strength.
I am unable to submit a
report.
Make sure you have full
signal strength and that your
Bluetooth volume level has
been turned up.
You did not register your
phone correctly on the
website.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is
registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to
use it.
You did not activate this
phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker
active.
I heard a commercial when
I tried to use Traffic, Direc-
tions and Information.
Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recog-
nizes you by your phone
number.
Make sure the currently
connected phone is the
same one that is registered
on your SYNCMyRide
account.
359
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice
commands and the media
voice commands at the
beginning of their respective
sections.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.
Review the media voice
commands at the beginning
of the media section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
the name of a song or artist.
Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
Do not use special charac-
ters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong
voice commands.
You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand
or is calling the wrong
contact when I want to
make a call.
360
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
Wilson, say "Call Joe
Wilson".
The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Contacts in your phonebook
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain
special characters. Using the SYNC phone
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
SYNC is having trouble
understanding. SYNC will
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.
The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
Do not use special charac-
ters, such as 123 or ICE, as
the system does not recog-
nize them.
If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call J-
A-K-E".
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Ensure you have a compat-
ible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
An AppLink capable phone
is not connected to SYNC.
When I select "Find New
Apps," SYNC does not find
any applications.
paired and connected to
361
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have down-
loaded and installed the
latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
AppLink-enabled apps are
not installed and running on
your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but
I still cannot find any apps.
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit" or "Quit"
Sometime apps do not
properly close and re-open
their connection to SYNC,
over ignition cycles, for
example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting "Apps."
then finding the particular
app and choosing "Force
stop." Don't forget to restart
the app afterwards, then
select "Find New Apps" on
SYNC.
362
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.
There is a bluetooth bug on
some order versions of the
Android OS. This bug may
cause apps that were found
the last time your phone
connected to SYNC not to
be found again if you have
not turned off bluetooth.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
363
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
back in to the phone. After a
few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
The USB connection to
SYNC may need to be reset.
My iPhone phone is
connected, my app is
running, I restarted the app
but I still cannot find it on
SYNC.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
use to connect. If you have
more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
availble Bluetooth ports, you
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on my
phone listed in SYNC's
Mobile Apps Menu.
364
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
SYNC™ (If Equipped)
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Hood deflectors.
• Graphics.
• Side-window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
• Spoiler.
Interior Style
• Ambient lighting.
• Door sill plates with logo.
• Floor mats.
• Illuminated door sill plate.
• Rear seat entertainment*.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Camping tent*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo net.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Conversation mirror.
• Roof racks and carriers*.
• Roof rails.
• Seat covers.
• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and
accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Full vehicle covers*.
• Locking fuel plug.
• Remote start.
• Vehicle security systems.
• Wheel locks.
*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
365
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example, two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
366
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor
Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP
you minimize your risk for unexpected
repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
367
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected
wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so
you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle’s maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles! To learn more,
call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
(CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
368
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 297).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers).
369
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the message
appearing. Make sure you reset the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil
change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset
(page 247).
If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5000 miles (8000
kilometers) from your last oil change.
Never exceed one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’ s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
370
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
371
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Engine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.
372
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-
joints.
373
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 247).
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last
engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
374
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the
message appearing in your information
display prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers).
Perform the 30000-mile
(48000-kilometer) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30000 miles (48000 kilometers) (for
example, the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor was reset at 25000 miles
[40000 kilometers]). Perform the
engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle
maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-
uled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.
*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
375
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle
maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*
This is an optional feature.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.
*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000
km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Every 5000 miles (8000
km) or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle
maintenance items under Exceptions.
*
This is an optional feature.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine
Oil Check (page 247).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.
Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
376
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD
only) in your vehicle does not require any
normal scheduled maintenance. Vehicles
are electronically monitored and notify the
driver required service by displaying a
message in the information display. The
PTU lubricant will be more likely to require
a change if the vehicle has experienced
extended periods of extreme/severe duty
cycle driving. Changing or checking the PTU
lubricant is not necessary unless the unit
has been submerged in water, shows signs
of leakage or a message indicating required
service is displayed. Contact your
authorized dealer for service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5000 miles (8000
kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
377
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
378
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
379
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
380
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
381
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
382
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
383
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
384
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
385
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
386
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
387
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
• Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
388
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
389
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
390
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
391
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (i) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
392
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
393
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.
(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator
394
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim. Arbitration fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’ s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all
filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:
395
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
396
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others
is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
397
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or
398
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
399
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
400
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
these End-User Terms under which this
Data was provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
401
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
402
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
403
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
404
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................114
About This Manual...........................................7
ABS
See: Brakes............................................................172
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................172
Accessories....................................................365
Exterior Style.......................................................365
Interior Style........................................................365
Lifestyle.................................................................365
Peace of Mind.....................................................365
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.............................................11
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............186
Active Park Assist.........................................178
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space.................................................................180
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature.........180
Troubleshooting the System...........................181
Using Active Park Assist...................................179
Adaptive Headlamps....................................83
Adjusting the Headlamps.........................257
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................258
Vertical Aim..........................................................257
Adjusting the Pedals.....................................75
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................72
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................72
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................73
End of Travel Position.........................................73
Memory Feature....................................................73
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps................................83
Airbag Disposal..............................................48
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................114
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............263
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm..........................................71
All-Wheel Drive.............................................165
Ambient Lighting...........................................85
Anti-Theft Alarm.............................................71
Arming the Alarm..................................................71
Disarming the Alarm............................................71
Appendices....................................................388
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............95
Headlamps On Warning Chime.....................96
Key in Ignition Warning Chime........................95
Keyless Warning Alert........................................96
Parking Brake On Warning Chime.................96
Audio Control...................................................73
MEDIA.......................................................................73
Seek, Next or Previous........................................73
Audio System.................................................310
General Information..........................................310
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Satellite Radio................................311
Menu Structure....................................................313
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD...................................................315
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD............................................................316
Autolamps.......................................................80
Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................80
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD....................115
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony Audio System........................117
Automatic High Beam Control..................82
Activating the System........................................83
Manually Overriding the System....................83
Automatic Transmission.............................161
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................164
Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................163
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................164
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission....................................................161
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission..............................161
405
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.............................................................252
Adding Transmission Fluid ............................253
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level...................................................................252
Autowipers........................................................76
Auxiliary Power Points................................143
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................143
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................143
Locations...............................................................143
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive.........................................165
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................254
Blind Spot Information System...............192
Switching the System Off and On...............194
System Errors.......................................................193
Using the System................................................192
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........243
Booster Seats..................................................25
Types of Booster Seats......................................26
Brake Fluid Check........................................253
Brakes................................................................172
General Information...........................................172
Breaking-In......................................................218
Bulb Specification Chart............................261
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................122
California Proposition 65..............................11
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................302
Specifications.....................................................302
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................305
Specifications.....................................................306
Capacities and Specifications................297
Cargo Nets......................................................201
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................264
Center Console..............................................145
Console Refrigerator and Freezer.................145
Second Row Center Console.........................145
Changing a Bulb...........................................258
Brake and Rear Lamps, Rear Direction
Indicator and Reversing Lamp................260
Front Direction Indicator and Front Parking
Lamp.................................................................259
Front Fog Lamp.................................................260
Headlamp.............................................................259
Headlamp Low Beam and Headlamp High
Beam.................................................................259
LED Lamps............................................................261
License Plate Lamp...........................................261
Changing a Fuse...........................................242
Fuses.......................................................................242
Changing a Road Wheel............................291
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................291
Tire Change Procedure....................................292
Changing the 12V Battery.........................254
Changing the Engine Air Filter................263
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................256
Front Wiper Blades...........................................256
Rear Wiper Blade...............................................256
Checking MyKey System Status...............57
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................256
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................39
Child Restraint Positioning..........................27
Child Safety.......................................................15
General Information.............................................15
Child Safety Locks.........................................29
Left-Hand Side.....................................................30
Right-Hand Side...................................................30
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................268
Cleaning Products.......................................264
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................268
Cleaning the Engine...................................266
Cleaning the Exterior..................................264
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................265
Exterior Plastic Parts........................................265
Stripes or Graphics............................................265
Underbody...........................................................265
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................267
Cleaning the Interior....................................267
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................266
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................56
Climate Control..............................................114
406
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Climate Controlled Seats...........................137
Cooled Seats.........................................................137
Heated Seats........................................................137
Collision Warning System.........................198
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................198
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check...........................248
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator........47
Creating a MyKey............................................55
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................55
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................194
False Alerts............................................................197
Switching the System Off and On................197
System Errors.......................................................197
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts..................................................................196
System Limitations............................................196
Using the System...............................................194
Cruise Control..................................................74
Principle of Operation.......................................185
Type 1.........................................................................74
Type 2........................................................................74
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................185
Customer Assistance.................................226
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................9
Service Data Recording........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps.............................82
Direction Indicators.......................................84
Lane Change..........................................................84
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................42
Children and Airbags...........................................42
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................42
Driving Aids.....................................................192
Driving Hints...................................................218
Driving Through Water................................219
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................82
E
Economical Driving......................................218
Emission Control System..........................158
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................159
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................160
End User License Agreement.................388
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ................................388
Engine Block Heater.....................................151
Using the Engine Block Heater......................152
Engine Coolant Check...............................248
Adding Engine Coolant....................................249
Checking the Engine Coolant.......................248
Recycled Engine Coolant................................249
Severe Climates.................................................250
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................250
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................70
Engine Oil Check...........................................247
Adding Engine Oil...............................................247
Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................247
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec..........................................................297
Drivebelt Routing...............................................297
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................297
Drivebelt Routing...............................................298
Environment......................................................14
Essential Towing Checks...........................212
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................214
Hitches....................................................................213
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC).........................................215
Safety Chains.......................................................213
Trailer Brake Controller Connector...............213
Trailer Brakes........................................................213
Trailer Lamps........................................................214
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................212
When Towing a Trailer......................................214
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options..................................13
407
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Extended Service Plan (ESP)..................367
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
ONLY)...............................................................368
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S.
Only)..................................................................367
Exterior Mirrors................................................87
Blind Spot Information System......................88
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................87
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................88
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................88
Memory Mirrors ...................................................88
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................87
Power-Folding Mirrors........................................87
Puddle Lamps.......................................................88
F
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................32
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................34
Seatbelt Extension Assembly.........................36
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................33
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................32
Floor Mats........................................................219
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................83
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................75
Ford Credit..........................................................11
(U.S. Only).................................................................11
Front Fog Lamps............................................83
Front Passenger Sensing System............43
Fuel and Refueling.......................................153
Fuel Consumption........................................157
Calculating Fuel Economy..............................158
Filling the Tank....................................................158
Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................154
Fuel Quality....................................................154
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................154
Fuel Shutoff...................................................222
Fuses.................................................................233
Fuse Specification Chart...........................233
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel..................................................................238
Power Distribution Box....................................233
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........138
Gauges................................................................91
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................49
Intelligent Access.................................................49
General Maintenance Information.......369
Multi-Point Inspection.......................................371
Owner Checks and Services..........................370
Protecting Your Investment..........................369
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................369
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................369
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................229
Getting the Services You Need...............226
Away From Home..............................................226
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................173
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................222
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................257
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................81
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp..........................258
Head Restraints.............................................123
Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................124
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................125
Heated Seats.................................................136
Front Seats............................................................136
Second Row Heated Seats.............................136
Heated Steering Wheel................................74
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................121
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................122
Heated Rear Window.........................................121
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................114
408
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate...........................................................118
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................119
General Hints........................................................118
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................119
Recommended Settings for Cooling...........120
Recommended Settings for Heating...........119
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................120
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................172
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........243
I
Ignition Switch...............................................147
In California (U.S. Only).............................227
Information Display Control.......................74
Information Displays.....................................97
General Information............................................97
Information Messages................................105
Adaptive Cruise Control..................................106
AdvanceTrac™....................................................106
Alarm......................................................................106
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................107
AWD.........................................................................107
Battery and Charging System.......................108
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System...................................................108
Brake System.......................................................109
Collision Warning System...............................109
Doors and Locks.................................................109
Fuel...........................................................................110
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................110
Maintenance.........................................................110
MyKey........................................................................111
Park Aid....................................................................112
Power Steering......................................................112
Seats.........................................................................112
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................113
Towing......................................................................113
Traction Control....................................................113
Transmission.........................................................113
Installing Child Restraints............................16
Child Seats...............................................................16
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts..........................17
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................22
Using Tether Straps.............................................23
Instrument Cluster..........................................91
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................81
Interior Lamps.................................................84
Front Row Map Lamps......................................85
Second Row Map Lamps..................................85
Interior Mirror...................................................89
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................89
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................223
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................223
Jump Starting......................................................224
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................223
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................224
K
Keyless Entry....................................................67
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad.................................................................67
Keyless Starting.............................................147
Ignition Modes.....................................................148
Keys and Remote Controls.........................49
L
Lighting Control..............................................79
Headlamp Flasher...............................................80
High Beams............................................................79
Lighting...............................................................79
General Information............................................79
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............201
Load Carrying.................................................201
Load Limit.......................................................201
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................208
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer..................................................................201
409
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Locking and Unlocking................................60
Activating Intelligent Access.............................61
Autolock...................................................................62
Autounlock ............................................................62
Battery Saver.........................................................63
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock........................................................62
Illuminated Entry..................................................63
Illuminated Exit.....................................................63
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................60
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside...........61
Power Door Locks................................................60
Remote Control....................................................60
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter.........................................................61
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.......................................................................61
Locks..................................................................60
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................291
M
Maintenance..................................................243
General Information.........................................243
Manual Climate Control..............................114
Manual Liftgate...............................................63
Closing the Liftgate.............................................64
Opening the Liftgate...........................................64
Manual Seats.................................................126
Lumbar Adjustment...........................................127
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward.............................................................126
Recline Adjustment...........................................126
Media Hub........................................................317
Memory Function.........................................128
Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................129
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
..............................................................................129
Saving a PreSet Position.................................128
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................97
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................121
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................86
Mobile Communications Equipment.......12
Moonroof..........................................................89
Bounce-Back.........................................................90
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............90
Venting the Moonroof........................................90
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............298
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................299
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................58
MyKey™.............................................................54
Principle of Operation........................................54
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........372
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™.........................372
Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................373
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................247
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................247
Opening and Closing the Hood..............243
Closing the Hood...............................................244
Opening the Hood.............................................243
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................230
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual...........231
Overhead Console.......................................146
P
Parking Aids.....................................................177
Principle of Operation........................................177
Parking Brake..................................................173
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................70
SecuriLock®...........................................................70
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................70
Pedals.................................................................75
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™.........................40
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................40
Post-Crash Alert System..........................225
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking............................60
410
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Power Liftgate.................................................64
Hands-Free Feature............................................67
Obstacle Detection.............................................66
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................65
Setting the Liftgate Open Height..................66
Stopping the Liftgate Movement..................66
Power Seats....................................................127
Power Lumbar.....................................................128
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................254
Power Windows.............................................86
Accessory Delay...................................................86
Bounce-Back.........................................................86
One-Touch Down................................................86
One-Touch Up......................................................86
Window Lock.........................................................86
Protecting the Environment........................14
R
Rear Parking Aid.............................................177
Rear Passenger Climate Controls............121
Rear Seats.......................................................129
Adjusting the Rear Seats.................................129
Rear View Camera.......................................182
Using the Rear View Camera System.........182
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera....................................182
Rear Window Wiper and Washers............77
Rear Camera Washer..........................................78
Rear Window Washer.........................................78
Rear Window Wiper.............................................77
Recommended Towing Weights............210
Refueling..........................................................155
Remote Control..............................................49
Car Finder.................................................................51
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter....................49
Intelligent Access Key........................................50
Memory Feature...................................................53
Remote Start.........................................................52
Replacing the Battery.........................................50
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................52
Remote Start..................................................122
Automatic Settings............................................122
Removing a Headlamp.............................258
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............268
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................11
Collision Repairs.....................................................11
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs...................................................................11
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................53
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................231
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................231
Roadside Assistance...................................221
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.........................................................221
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage.................222
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................222
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................221
Roadside Emergencies...............................221
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................201
Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................218
Running Out of Fuel....................................154
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................155
Filling a Portable Fuel Container..................155
S
Safety Canopy™............................................46
Safety Precautions.......................................153
Scheduled Maintenance Record............377
Scheduled Maintenance..........................369
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................36
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................37
Belt-Minder™.........................................................37
Seatbelts............................................................31
Principle of Operation..........................................31
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................36
Conditions of operation.....................................37
Seats..................................................................123
Security..............................................................70
411
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Side Airbags.....................................................45
Sitting in the Correct Position..................123
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.................................287
Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II).......................12
Special Instructions..............................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................375
Exceptions............................................................376
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................185
Stability Control.............................................175
Principle of Operation.......................................175
Starter Switch
See: Ignition Switch............................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................148
Automatic Engine Shutdown........................150
Failure to Start.....................................................150
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.................151
Important Ventilating Information................151
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving.................................................................151
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary.........................................................150
Vehicles with an Ignition Key.........................148
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................149
Starting and Stopping the Engine..........147
General Information...........................................147
Steering............................................................197
Electric Power Steering.....................................197
Steering Wheel................................................72
Storage Compartments.............................145
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................89
Sun Visors.........................................................89
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................89
Supplementary Restraints System..........41
Principle of Operation.........................................41
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................336
911 Assist...............................................................336
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions &
Information (TDI) (If Equipped, United
States Only)...................................................340
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United
States Only)....................................................338
SYNC™ AppLink™.....................................344
SYNC Mobile Apps............................................344
SYNC™............................................................318
General Information..........................................318
SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................356
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate...........................................63
See: Power Liftgate.............................................64
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............297
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).......................228
Tire Care...........................................................273
Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................275
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................273
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................276
Temperature A B C.............................................274
Traction AA A B C...............................................274
Treadwear.............................................................274
Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........288
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................289
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................289
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................271
Towing a Trailer............................................209
Load Placement................................................209
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...........................................................216
Emergency Towing.............................................216
Recreational Towing..........................................216
Towing.............................................................209
Traction Control.............................................174
Principle of Operation.......................................174
412
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Trailer Sway Control....................................210
Transmission Code Designation.............301
Transmission...................................................161
Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................161
Transporting the Vehicle............................215
U
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................245
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................246
Universal Garage Door Opener...............138
HomeLink Wireless Control System...........138
USB Port...........................................................317
Using Adaptive Cruise Control................186
Automatic Cancellation...................................189
Blocked Sensor...................................................190
Canceling the Set Speed.................................188
Changing the Set Speed.................................189
Detection Issues.................................................189
Following a Vehicle............................................187
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................189
Overriding the System......................................188
Resuming the Set Speed.................................189
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............187
Setting the Gap Distance................................188
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................189
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On........................................................................186
Switching to Normal Cruise Control.............191
System Not Available.......................................190
Using All-Wheel Drive.................................165
Driving In Special Conditions With
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)...............................167
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires....................................................................166
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires....................................................................166
Using Cruise Control....................................185
Switching Cruise Control Off.........................186
Switching Cruise Control On..........................185
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................58
Using Snow Chains.....................................287
Using Stability Control................................176
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................346
Accessing Your Play Menu...............................351
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................346
Media Menu Features......................................349
Media Voice Commands................................348
System Settings.................................................353
What's Playing?.................................................347
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............323
Accessing Features Through the Phone
Menu..................................................................327
Accessing Your Phone Settings....................332
Making a Call.......................................................326
Pairing a Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................323
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................324
Phone Options during an Active Call.........326
Phone Voice Commands................................324
Receiving Calls....................................................326
System Settings.................................................333
Text Messaging...................................................330
Using Traction Control................................174
Switching the System Off................................174
System Indicator Lights and
Messages...........................................................174
Using a Switch......................................................174
Using the Information Display
Controls..............................................................174
Using Voice Recognition...........................320
Initiating a Voice Session................................320
System Interaction and Feedback...............321
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................229
V
Vehicle Care...................................................264
General Information.........................................264
Vehicle Certification Label........................301
Vehicle Identification Number...............300
413
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Vehicle Storage............................................269
Battery...................................................................270
Body.......................................................................269
Brakes.....................................................................270
Cooling system...................................................270
Engine....................................................................269
Fuel system..........................................................270
General..................................................................269
Miscellaneous.....................................................270
Removing Vehicle From Storage..................270
Tires.........................................................................270
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................114
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...........300
Voice Control....................................................74
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................92
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................92
Airbag Readiness.................................................93
Anti-Lock Braking System................................93
Battery......................................................................93
Brake System.........................................................93
Charging System..................................................93
Cruise Control........................................................93
Directional Indicator............................................95
Door Ajar..................................................................93
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................93
Engine Oil................................................................94
Fasten Seatbelt....................................................94
Front Airbag...........................................................94
Front Fog Lamps..................................................94
Head Up Display...................................................94
High Beam..............................................................94
Liftgate Ajar............................................................94
Low Fuel Level......................................................94
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................94
Low Washer Fluid.................................................94
Parking Lamps......................................................94
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power...................................................................95
Service Engine Soon...........................................95
Stability Control....................................................95
Stability Control Off............................................95
Washer Fluid Check....................................254
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................264
See: Wipers and Washers.................................76
Waxing.............................................................265
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................291
Wheels and Tires...........................................271
General Information...........................................271
Technical Specifications.................................296
Windows and Mirrors...................................86
Windshield Washers......................................77
Windshield Wipers.........................................76
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................76
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................256
Wipers and Washers.....................................76
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle........................215
414
Flex (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
